table of contents - lexus owners...2 ct200h_navi_om76146u_(u) 14.06.17 11:11 introduction this...

403
1 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 1 QUICK GUIDE 9 2 BASIC FUNCTION 33 3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 81 4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 167 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 263 6 INFORMATION 281 7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 285 8 PHONE 303 9 LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE 351 INDEX 385 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Upload: others

Post on 22-Jun-2020

2 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

11

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 QUICK GUIDE 9

2 BASIC FUNCTION 33

3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM 81

4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 167

5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 263

6 INFORMATION 281

7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM 285

8 PHONE 303

9 LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE 351

INDEX 385

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page 2: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

2

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Introduction

This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manualcarefully to ensure proper use. Keep this manual in your vehicle at all times.The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of the navigation system dif-fer depending on whether the functions and/or a contract existed and the map dataavailable at the time of producing this document.Please be aware that the content of this manual may be different from the navigationsystem in some cases, such as when the system’s software is updated.

The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle accesso-ries ever developed. The system receives satellite signals from the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. Using these signals andother vehicle sensors, the system indicates your present position and assists in locatinga desired destination.The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your present startinglocation to your destination. The system is also designed to direct you to a destinationthat is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner. The system uses DENSO maps. The cal-culated routes may not be the shortest nor the least traffic congested. Your own per-sonal local knowledge or “short cut” may at times be faster than the calculated routes.The navigation system’s database includes Point of Interest categories to allow you toeasily select destinations such as restaurants and hotels. If a destination is not in the da-tabase, you can enter the street address or a major intersection close to it and the sys-tem will guide you there.The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The audio instructionswill announce the distance remaining and the direction to turn in when approaching anintersection. These voice instructions will help you keep your eyes on the road and aretimed to provide enough time to allow you to maneuver, change lanes or slow down.Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limitations thatmay affect their ability to perform properly. The accuracy of the vehicle’s position de-pends on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circum-stances. For more information on the limitations of the system, refer to page 160.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Page 3: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

3

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

For safety reasons, this manual indicates items requiring particular attention with thefollowing marks.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL

WARNING

● This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning isignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk ofinjury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

● This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipmentif the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order toavoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

SYMBOLS USED IN ILLUSTRATIONS

Safety symbolThe symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not dothis” or “Do not let this happen”.

Arrows indicating operations

Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.)used to operate switches and other devic-es.

Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g.a lid opens).

Page 4: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

4

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

No. Name Description

Operational Outlines An outline of the operation is explained.

Main Operations The steps of an operation are explained.

Related Operations A main operation’s supplementary operations are described.

Information Useful information for the user is described.

Page 5: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

5

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

To use this system in the safest possiblemanner, follow all the safety tips shown be-low.This system is intended to assist in reachingthe destination and, if used properly, can doso. The driver is solely responsible for thesafe operation of your vehicle and the safetyof your passengers.Do not use any feature of this system to theextent it becomes a distraction and pre-vents safe driving. The first priority whiledriving should always be the safe operationof the vehicle. While driving, be sure to ob-serve all traffic regulations. Prior to the actual use of this system, learnhow to use it and become thoroughly famil-iar with it. Read the entire Navigation Sys-tem Owner’s Manual to make sure youunderstand the system. Do not allow otherpeople to use this system until they haveread and understood the instructions in thismanual.For your safety, some functions may be-come inoperable when driving. Unavailablescreen buttons are dimmed. Only when thevehicle is not moving, can the destinationand route selection be done.

While driving, listen to the voice instructionsas much as possible and glance at thescreen briefly and only when it is safe. How-ever, do not totally rely on voice guidance.Use it just for reference. If the system can-not determine the current position correct-ly, there is a possibility of incorrect, late, ornon-voice guidance.The data in the system may occasionally beincomplete. Road conditions, includingdriving restrictions (no left turns, street clo-sures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore,before following any instructions from thesystem, look to see whether the instructioncan be done safely and legally.This system cannot warn about such thingsas the safety of an area, condition of streets,and availability of emergency services. If un-sure about the safety of an area, do not driveinto it. Under no circumstances is this sys-tem a substitute for the driver’s personaljudgement.Use this system only in locations where it islegal to do so. Some states/provinces mayhave laws prohibiting the use of video andnavigation screens next to the driver.

SAFETY INSTRUCTION WARNING

● For safety, the driver should not operatethe navigation system while he/she isdriving. Insufficient attention to the roadand traffic may cause an accident.

● While driving, be sure to obey the trafficregulations and maintain awareness ofthe road conditions. If a traffic sign on theroad has been changed, route guidancemay not have the updated informationsuch as the direction of a one way street.

Page 6: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

TABLE OF CONTENTS

6

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1. BASIC FUNCTION......................................... 10

Remote Touch........................................................... 10“Menu” SCREEN .................................................... 12HOME SCREEN .................................................... 14

2. QUICK REFERENCE ................................... 18

“Setup” SCREEN..................................................... 18“Information” SCREEN........................................20

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION .................. 22

REGISTERING HOME...................................... 22REGISTERING PRESET

DESTINATIONS ................................................ 24OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE

ROUTE.................................................................... 26SETTING HOME AS

THE DESTINATION ........................................28

4. FUNCTION INDEX...................................... 30

FUNCTION INDEX ............................................30

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION ............................................... 34

INITIAL SCREEN ..................................................34HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch .............36HOME SCREEN OPERATION....................38ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/

LIST SCREEN OPERATION.......................40SCREEN ADJUSTMENT ..................................44

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS................................. 46

REGISTERING/CONNECTING Bluetooth® DEVICE.........................................46

SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS .....................54

3. OTHER SETTINGS ....................................... 64

GENERAL SETTINGS .......................................64VOICE SETTINGS ............................................... 72VEHICLE SETTINGS .......................................... 74

1. BASIC OPERATION..................................... 82

QUICK REFERENCE......................................... 82MAP SCREEN OPERATION ........................85MAP SCREEN INFORMATION.................. 93TRAFFIC INFORMATION ............................ 100

2. DESTINATION SEARCH......................... 105

DESTINATION SEARCH SCREEN ......... 105SEARCH OPERATION ...................................107STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ............... 121

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE ................................. 125

ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN ...................125TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE

PROMPTS............................................................132EDITING ROUTE ................................................133

4. MEMORY POINTS .................................... 139

MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS ...................139

5. SETUP ................................................................151

DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS..... 151TRAFFIC SETTINGS ..........................................157

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM ....................................................... 160

GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) ............................................................. 160

MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERED AREA ...........................................163

1 QUICK GUIDE

2 BASIC FUNCTION

3 NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Page 7: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

7

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1. BASIC OPERATION ................................... 168

QUICK REFERENCE .......................................168SOME BASICS..................................................... 170

2. RADIO OPERATION ................................ 179

AM/FM RADIO ................................................... 179XM Satellite Radio ............................................... 192INTERNET RADIO ........................................... 200

3. MEDIA OPERATION ................................201

CD...............................................................................201DVD...........................................................................207USB MEMORY .................................................... 214iPod ............................................................................. 219Bluetooth® AUDIO ...........................................226AUX ..........................................................................232VTR ........................................................................... 235

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS ............................................. 238

STEERING SWITCHES.................................. 238

5. SETUP .............................................................240

AUDIO SETTINGS........................................... 240

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM ...................249

OPERATING INFORMATION..................249

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION............................................. 264

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM.................. 264CASUAL

SPEECH RECOGNIZATION ................ 272COMMAND LIST ............................................. 274

2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION.............................................278

MOBILE ASSISTANT ......................................278

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY ......................282

RECEIVING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION.............................................282

DATA SERVICES SETTINGS......................284

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR .................................................286

LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR.........................................................286

ESTIMATED COURSE LINE DISPLAY MODE................................................................... 291

PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE............................................293

LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PRECAUTIONS .............................................295

THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ........... 300

4 AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM 5 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

6 INFORMATION

7 PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 8: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

TABLE OF CONTENTS

8

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES) ................................................... 304

QUICK REFERENCE ......................................304SOME BASICS................................................... 305CALLING ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE ................................................................310RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE ................................................................ 316TALKING ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE ................................................................ 317Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE

FUNCTION.......................................................320

2. SETUP ............................................................. 327

PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS................ 327

3. WHAT TO DO IF... ..................................... 344

TROUBLESHOOTING..................................344

1. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE-OVERVIEW....................... 352

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW....................... 352TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY

USING A CELLULAR PHONE..............353TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY

USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM ...........................358

TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM......................................................361

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION..................... 362

LEXUS App Suite ............................................... 362Destination Assist................................................ 372eDestination........................................................... 374Lexus Insider.......................................................... 378

3. SETUP ............................................................. 382

LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS ......................382

ALPHABETICAL INDEX............................. 386

8 PHONE 9 LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE

INDEX

Page 9: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

9

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:44

1. Remote Touch ............................................... 10

2. “Menu” SCREEN ......................................... 12

3. HOME SCREEN ......................................... 14STATUS DISPLAY...................................................... 16

1. “Setup” SCREEN ......................................... 18

2. “Information” SCREEN............................. 20

1. REGISTERING HOME............................ 22

2. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS...................................... 24

3. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE .............................................. 26

4. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION ........................................ 28

1. FUNCTION INDEX .................................. 30

1 BASIC FUNCTION

2 QUICK REFERENCE

3 NAVIGATION OPERATION

4 FUNCTION INDEX

QUICK GUIDE

Page 10: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

10

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1. BASIC FUNCTION

1. Remote Touch

Page 11: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

1. BASIC FUNCTION

1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

11

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

No. Name Function Page

“MENU” button Press to display the “Menu” screen. 12

“ · ” button Press to change the scale of the map and to scrollthe list screen. 36, 42, 86

“HOME” button Press to display the home screen. 14, 38

Remote Touch knob

Move in the desired direction to select a function,letter and screen button.Press to enter the selected function, letter orscreen button.

36

Page 12: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

12

1. BASIC FUNCTION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

2. “Menu” SCREEN

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the “Menu” screen.

Page 13: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

1. BASIC FUNCTION

1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

13

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

No. Function Page

Select to display the air conditioning control screen. “Owner’s Manual”

Select to display the map screen. 82

Select to display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen. 362

Select to display the “Information” screen. 20

Select to display the radio control screen.168

Select to display the media control screen.

Select to display the hands-free operation screen. 304

Select to display the “Setup” screen. 18

Select to adjust the contrast and brightness of the screens, turn thescreen off, etc. 44

Page 14: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

14

1. BASIC FUNCTION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3. HOME SCREEN

Three-way split screen

Press the “HOME” button on the Remote Touch to display the home screen.The home screen can display multiple information screens, such as the navigation sys-tem screen, audio system screen and fuel consumption screen, simultaneously. Whena screen is selected, the selected screen is switched to a full-screen display. The homescreen can be set to either a three-way split screen or a two-way split screen.For details about setting the home screen: P.38

Page 15: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

1. BASIC FUNCTION

1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

15

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Two-way split screen

No. Function Page

Displays the condition of the Bluetooth® connection 16

Select to change the display items/area and the home screen layout. 38

Page 16: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

16

1. BASIC FUNCTION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

STATUS DISPLAY

The condition of the Bluetooth® connection, as well as the level of reception and theamount of cellular phone battery charge left, are displayed on the status bar. This statusbar is always shown on all modes.

No. Indicators Conditions

The condition ofthe Bluetooth®

connection

(Gray) (Blue)No connection Poor Good An antenna for the Bluetooth® connection is built into the instru-

ment panel. The condition of the Bluetooth® connection maydeteriorate and the system may not function when a Bluetooth®

phone is used in the following conditions and/or places:The cellular phone is obstructed by certain objects (such as whenit is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box).The cellular phone is touching or is covered with metal materials.

Leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where the condition of theBluetooth® connection is good.

Page 17: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

1. BASIC FUNCTION

1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

17

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

The level of reception

Poor Excellent The level of reception does not always correspond with the level

displayed on the cellular phone. The level of reception may not bedisplayed depending on the phone you have.When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a placeinaccessible by radio waves, “No Service” is displayed.

“Rm” is displayed when receiving in a roaming area. While roam-ing, display “Rm” top-left on the icon.

The receiving area may not be displayed depending on the type ofphone you have.

The amount of battery charge left

Empty Full The amount displayed does not always correspond with the

amount displayed on the Bluetooth® device.The amount of battery charge left may not be displayed dependingon the type of the Bluetooth® device connected.This system does not have a charging function.

No. Indicators Conditions

Page 18: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

18

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

2. QUICK REFERENCE

1. “Setup” SCREEN

The items shown on the “Setup” screen can be set. Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch, then select “Setup” to display the “Setup” screen.

Page 19: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

2. QUICK REFERENCE

1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

19

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

No. Function Page

Select to change the selected language, operation sound, automaticscreen change settings, etc. 64

Select to set the voice guidance settings. 72

Select to set Bluetooth® phones and Bluetooth® audio devices. 54

Select to set radio and external media settings. 240

Select to set traffic information. 157

Select to set memory points (home, preset destinations, address bookentries, areas to avoid), navigation details or to delete previous destina-tions.

139, 151

Select to set vehicle information such as maintenance information. 74

Select to set the phone sound, contacts, message settings, etc. 327

Select to set LEXUS App Suite settings. 382

Select to set data services settings. 284

Page 20: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

20

2. QUICK REFERENCE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

2. “Information” SCREEN

This screen can be used to display traffic information, fuel consumption, etc. Press the“MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info” to display the “Information”screen.

Page 21: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

2. QUICK REFERENCE

1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

21

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

No. Function Page

Select to display the fuel consumption screen. “Owner’s Manual”

Select to display traffic information. 100

Select to display weather information. 282

Select to display the “LEXUS Insider” screen. 378

Page 22: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

22

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

1. REGISTERING HOME

Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

Select “Nav”.

Select “Dest.”.

Select “Go Home”.

Select “Yes”.

There are different kinds of meth-ods to search for your home. (P.105)

1

2

3

4

5

6

Page 23: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

23

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Select “Enter”.

Select “OK”.

Registration of home is complete. Registering home in a different way P.140

Editing the name, location, phone num-ber and icon P.141

Setting home as the destination P.109

7

8

Page 24: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

24

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

2. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS

Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

Select “Nav”.

Select “Dest.”.

Select one of the preset destinationbuttons.

Select “Yes”.

There are different kinds of meth-ods to search for a destination.(P.105)

1

2

3

4

5

6

Page 25: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

25

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Select “Enter”.

Select “OK”.

Registration of preset destinations is com-plete.Registering preset destinations in a dif-

ferent way P.142

Editing the name, location, phone num-ber and icon P.143

Setting preset destinations as the desti-nationP.109

7

8

Page 26: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

26

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE

Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

Select “Nav”.

Select “Dest.”.

There are different kinds of meth-ods to search for a destination.(P.105)

Select “Go”.

1

2

3

4

5

Page 27: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

27

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Select “OK”.

Selecting routes other than the one recom-mended (P.121)Guidance to the destination is displayedon the screen and can be heard via voiceguidance.

6

Page 28: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

28

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

4. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION

Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

Select “Nav”.

Select “Dest.”.

Select “Go Home”.

1

2

3

4

Page 29: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

29

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Select “OK”.

Selecting routes other than the one recom-mended (P.121)Guidance to the destination is displayedon the screen and can be heard via voiceguidance.

5

Page 30: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

30

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

4. FUNCTION INDEX

1. FUNCTION INDEX

Map

Route guidance

Displaying maps Page

Viewing the map screen 82

Displaying the current position 85

Viewing the current position vicinity map 91

Changing the scale 86

Changing the map orientation 88

Displaying map Information 93

Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination 126

Selecting the map mode 89

Displaying traffic information 100

Searching for destinations Page

Searching for the destination 107

Changing the search area 108

Before starting or during route guidance Page

Starting route guidance 121

Editing the route 133

Viewing the entire route map 127

Pausing guidance 124

Adjusting route guidance volume 72

Deleting the destination 135

Address book Page

Registering address book entries 144

Marking icons on the map 145

Page 31: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

4. FUNCTION INDEX

1

QU

ICK

GU

IDE

31

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Useful functions

Information Page

Displaying vehicle maintenance 75

Hands-free system (for cellular phone) Page

Registering/connecting a Bluetooth® phone 46

Making a call on a Bluetooth® phone 310

Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® phone 316

Voice command system Page

Operating the system with your voice 264

Peripheral monitoring system Page

Viewing behind the rear of the vehicle 286

Page 32: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

32

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Page 33: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

2

33

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.04 19:41

1. INITIAL SCREEN ....................................... 34

2. HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch...... 36

3. HOME SCREEN OPERATION ........... 38

4. ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION............................................ 40

ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS....... 40

LIST SCREEN................................................................ 41

5. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT ........................ 44

1. REGISTERING/CONNECTING Bluetooth® DEVICE............................... 46

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® PHONE FOR THE FIRST TIME .......................................... 46

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® AUDIO PLAYER FOR THE FIRST TIME ..................... 48

PROFILES ..................................................................... 50

CERTIFICATION...................................................... 52

2. SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS ............ 54

“Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN ............................... 55

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DEVICE ......... 56

DELETING A Bluetooth® DEVICE................... 57

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE ...... 58

EDITING THE Bluetooth® DEVICE INFORMATION.................................................... 60

“System Settings” SCREEN ................................... 62

1. GENERAL SETTINGS.............................. 64

GENERAL SETTINGS SCREEN ...................... 65

2. VOICE SETTINGS..................................... 72

VOICE SETTINGS SCREEN............................... 73

3. VEHICLE SETTINGS ................................ 74

MAINTENANCE ....................................................... 75

1 BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

2 Bluetooth® SETTINGS

3 OTHER SETTINGS

BASIC FUNCTION

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Page 34: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

34

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

1. INITIAL SCREEN

1 When the power switch is in ACCES-SORY or ON mode, the initial screenwill be displayed and the system will be-gin operating.

After a few seconds, the “CAUTION”screen will be displayed.

After about 5 seconds, the “CAUTION”screen automatically switches to the homescreen. (Select “Continue” or press the“HOME” button on the Remote Touch todisplay the home screen.)

Images shown on the initial screen can bechanged to suit individual preferences.(P.68.)

WARNING

● When the vehicle is stopped with thehybrid system operating, always apply theparking brake for safety.

Page 35: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

35

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Press and hold the “PWR•VOL” knobfor 3 seconds or more.

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

This system reminds users when to re-place certain parts or components andshows dealer information (if registered)on the screen.When the vehicle reaches a previouslyset driving distance or date specified fora scheduled maintenance check, the“Maintenance Reminder” screen will bedisplayed when the navigation system isturned on.

This screen goes off if the screen is notoperated for several seconds.To prevent this screen from being dis-

played again, select “Do Not DisplayThis Message Again”.To register maintenance information:P.75

If is selected, the registered phonenumber can be called.

RESTARTING THE SYSTEM

When system response is extremelyslow, the system can be restarted.

Page 36: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

36

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

2. HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch

1 Use the Remote Touch knob to selectthe desired button on the screen.

2 To select the button on the screen, pressthe Remote Touch knob. Once a buttonhas been selected, the screen willchange.

When the pointer moves close to a button,it will be automatically pulled onto that but-ton. The strength of this pull can beadjusted. (P.64)The pointer will disappear from the screen

if it is not moved for 6 seconds. Operationof the Remote Touch knob will cause thepointer to reappear.Press the “ ” button on the Remote Touch

to zoom in on the map screen and the “ ”button to zoom out. These buttons can alsobe used to scroll up and down on listscreens.

When is displayed on the screen,

select to return to the previousscreen.Press the “MENU” button on the Remote

Touch to display the “Menu” screen.(P.12)The home screen can be displayed by

pressing the “HOME” button on theRemote Touch. (P.14)

This navigation system can be operatedby the Remote Touch when the powerswitch is in ACCESSORY or ONmode.

Page 37: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

37

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

WARNING

● Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair tobecome caught in the Remote Touch asthis may cause an injury.

● Be careful when touching the RemoteTouch in extreme temperatures as it maybecome very hot or cold due to the tem-perature inside the vehicle.

NOTICE

● Do not allow the Remote Touch to comeinto contact with food, liquid, stickers or litcigarettes as doing so may cause it tochange color, emit a strange odor or stopfunctioning.

● Do not subject the Remote Touch toexcessive pressure or strong impact asthe knob may bend or break off.

● Do not allow coins, contact lenses orother such items to become caught in theRemote Touch as this may cause it to stopfunctioning.

● Items of clothing may rip if they becomecaught on the Remote Touch knob.

● If your hand or any object is on theRemote Touch knob when the powerswitch is turned to ACCESSORY mode,the Remote Touch knob may not operateproperly.

INFORMATION

● Under extremely cold conditions, theRemote Touch knob may react slowly.

Page 38: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

38

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3. HOME SCREEN OPERATION

1 Press the “HOME” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Check that the home screen is dis-played.

When a screen is selected, the selectedscreen will change to a full-screen display.

1 Select .

2 Check that “Customize Home Screen”is displayed.

The home screen can display multipleinformation screens, such as the naviga-tion system screen, audio system screenand fuel consumption screen, simulta-neously.

CUSTOMIZING THE HOME SCREEN

The display items/area on the homescreen and the home screen layout canbe changed.

No. Function Page

Select to change the dis-play items/area. 39

Select to change the homescreen layout. 39

Page 39: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

39

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ CHANGING THE DISPLAYITEMS/AREA

1 Select the desired item.

2 Select the desired area.

■ CHANGING THE HOME SCREENLAYOUT

1 Select “Change Layout”.

2 Select the desired screen layout.

INFORMATION

● When the selected item is already beingdisplayed and another area is selected forthat item, the item that it is replacing willbe displayed in the original item’s loca-tion.

Page 40: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

40

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

4. ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION

On certain letter entry screens, letters canbe entered in upper or lower case.

: Select to enter in lower case.

: Select to enter in upper case.

When searching by an address, name,etc., or entering data, letters and num-bers can be entered via the screen.

ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS

No. Function

Select to enter desired characters.

Text field. Entered character(s) willbe displayed.

During entering character(s), whenthere is only one available option forthe next character(s), the next char-acter(s) will be displayed in gray textin the text field automatically. Graytext is entered by selecting this but-ton.

Select to erase one character. Selectand hold to continue erasing charac-ters.

Select to display the alphabet keys.

Select to display other symbols.

Keyboard layout can be changed.(P.64)

Page 41: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

41

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Enter characters and select “OK”.

Matching items from the database arelisted even if the entered address or nameis incomplete.The list will be displayed automatically if the

maximum number of characters is enteredor matching items can be displayed on asingle list screen.

■ SELECTING ALL ITEMS

1 Select “Select All”.

“Unselect All”: Unselect all items in the list.

LIST SCREEN

DISPLAYING THE LIST

The list screen may be displayed afterentering characters.

INFORMATION

● The number of matching items is shownon the right side of the screen. If the num-ber of matching items is more than 999,the system displays “” on the screen.

Some lists contain “Select All”. If“Select All” is selected, it is possible toselect all items.

Page 42: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

42

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Sort”.

2 Select the desired sorting criteria.

LIST SCREEN OPERATION

When a list is displayed, use the appro-priate screen button to scroll throughthe list.

Icon Function

Select to skip to the next or previ-ous page.

Select and hold or toscroll through the displayed list.

This indicates the displayedscreen’s position.

If appears to the right of anitem name, the complete name istoo long to display.

Select to scroll to the end ofthe name.

Select to move to the begin-ning of the name.

INFORMATION

● The “ ” and “ ” buttons on the RemoteTouch can be used to scroll up and downon list screens.

SORTING

The order of a list displayed on thescreen can be sorted in the order of dis-tance from the current location, date,category, etc.

Page 43: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

43

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select the desired character jump but-tons.

CHARACTER JUMP BUTTONS IN LISTS

Some lists contain character screen but-tons, “ABC”, “DEF” etc., which allow adirect jump to list entries that begin withthe same letter as the character screenbutton.

INFORMATION

● Every time the same character screenbutton is selected, the list starting with thesubsequent character is displayed.

Page 44: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

44

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

5. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Display”.

3 Select the items to be set.The contrast and brightness of thescreen display and the image of thecamera display can be adjusted. Thescreen can also be turned off, and/orchanged to either day or night mode.(For information regarding audio/visualscreen adjustment: P.176)

No. Function Page

Select to turn the screen off.To turn it on, press any but-ton on the audio panel or onthe Remote Touch.

Select to turn day modeon/off. 45

Select to adjust the screendisplay.

45Select to adjust the cameradisplay.

INFORMATION

● When the screen is viewed throughpolarized sunglasses, a rainbow patternmay appear on the screen due to opticalcharacteristics of the screen. If this is dis-turbing, please operate the screen with-out polarized sunglasses.

Page 45: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

45

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Day Mode”. In the following conditions, the display’s

condition is not changed to night modeeven if headlight switch is turned on:• The instrument panel light control dial is

turned fully to the upper.• The vehicle is in a bright area, such as out-

side in direct sunlight.

1 Select “General” or “Camera”.

2 Select the desired item.

“Display (General)” screen only: Select “ ”or “ ” to select the desired display.

CHANGING BETWEEN DAY AND NIGHT MODE

Depending on the position of the head-light switch, the screen changes to dayor night mode. This feature is availablewhen the headlight is switched on.

INFORMATION

● If the screen is set to day mode with theheadlight switch turned on, this conditionis memorized even with the hybrid systemturned off.

ADJUSTING THE CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS

The contrast and brightness of thescreen can be adjusted according to thebrightness of your surroundings.

Screen button Function

“Contrast” “+” Select to strengthen thecontrast of the screen.

“Contrast” “-” Select to weaken thecontrast of the screen.

“Brightness” “+” Select to brighten thescreen.

“Brightness” “-” Select to darken thescreen.

Page 46: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

46

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

1. REGISTERING/CONNECTING Bluetooth® DEVICE

1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection settingof your cellular phone on.

This function is not available whenBluetooth® connection setting of your cel-lular phone is set to off.

2 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

3 Select “Phone”.

Operations up to this point can also be per-formed by pressing the switch on thesteering wheel.

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® PHONE FOR THE FIRST TIME

To use the hands-free system, it is neces-sary to register a Bluetooth® phone withthe system.Once the phone has been registered, itis possible to use the hands-free system.This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.For details about registering aBluetooth® device: P.56

Page 47: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

47

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

4 Select “Yes” to register a phone.

5 When this screen is displayed, searchfor the device name displayed on thisscreen on the screen of yourBluetooth® device.

For details about operating the Bluetooth®

device, see the manual that comes with it.To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.

6 Register the Bluetooth® device usingyour Bluetooth® device.

A PIN-code is not required for SSP(Secure Simple Pairing) compatibleBluetooth® devices. Depending on thetype of Bluetooth® device being con-nected, a message confirming registrationmay be displayed on the Bluetooth®

device’s screen. Respond and operate theBluetooth® device according to the confir-mation message.

7 Check that the following screen is dis-played when registration is complete.

The system waits for connection requestscoming from the registered device.

At this stage, the Bluetooth® functions arenot yet available.

Page 48: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

48

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

8 Select “OK” when the connection sta-tus changes from “Connecting...” to“Connected”.

If an error message is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try again.

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® AUDIO PLAYER FOR THE FIRST TIME

To use the Bluetooth® Audio, it is nec-essary to register an audio player withthe system.Once the player has been registered, itis possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio.This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.For details about registering aBluetooth® device: P.56

Page 49: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

49

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection settingof your audio player on.

This function is not available when theBluetooth® connection setting of youraudio player is set to off.

2 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

3 Select “Radio” or “Media”.

4 Select “Source”.

5 Select “Bluetooth*”.

6 Select “Connect”.

7 Select “Yes” to register a audio player.

8 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING ABluetooth® PHONE FOR THE FIRSTTIME” from “STEP 5”. (P.46)

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

Page 50: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

50

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

PROFILES

This system supports the following services.

Bluetooth® Device Spec. Function Require-

mentsRecom-

mendations

Bluetooth®

Phone/Bluetooth®

Audio Player

Bluetooth® SpecificationRegistering a Bluetooth® device

Ver.2.0 Ver.3.0 +EDR

Bluetooth® Device Profile Function Require-

mentsRecom-

mendations

Bluetooth®

Phone

HFP (Hands-Free Profile) Hands-free system Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.6

OPP (Object Push Profile)Transferring the contacts

Ver. 1.1 Ver. 1.2

PBAP (Phone Book AccessProfile) Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.1

MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth®

phone message Ver. 1.0

SPP (Serial Port Profile) “LEXUS App Suite” function Ver. 1.1

Bluetooth®

Audio Player

A2DP (Advanced Audio Distri-bution Profile) Bluetooth®

audio system

Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.2

AVRCP (Audio/Video RemoteControl Profile) Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.4

Page 51: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

51

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

INFORMATION

●If your cellular phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth® phone or usingOPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles individually will not be possible.

●If the connected Bluetooth® device version is older than recommended or incompatible,the Bluetooth® device function may not work properly.

●Refer to http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink to find approved Bluetooth® phones for thissystem.

Page 52: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

52

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

U.S.A.

CERTIFICATION

FCC ID : BABFT0048AThis device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

CAUTION:FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation

ExposureThis equipment complies with FCCradiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment and meets theFCC radio frequency (RF) ExposureGuidelines. This equipment should beinstalled and operated keeping theradiator at least 20cm or more awayfrom person’s body in normal useposition.Co-location: This transmitter must not be

co-located or operated in conjunctionwith any other antenna or transmitter.

Page 53: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

53

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

Canada

IC : 2024B-FT0048AThis device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSSstandard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference,including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.Le présent appareil est conforme auxCNR d’Industrie Canada applicablesaux appareils radio exempts de licence.L’exploitation est autorisée aux deuxconditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doitpas produire de brouillage, et (2)l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit acceptertout brouillage radioélectrique subi,même si le brouillage est susceptible d’encompromettre le fonctionnement.

CAUTION:CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation

ExposureThis equipment complies with ICradiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment and meetsRSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)Exposure rules. This equipment shouldbe installed and operated keeping theradiator at least 20cm or more awayfrom person’s body (excludingextremities: hands, wrists, feet andankles).ATTENTION: l’exposition auxrayonnements radiofréquence- Cet équipement est conforme auxlimites d’exposition aux rayonnementsénoncées pour un environnement noncontrôlé et respecte les règlesd’exposition aux fréquencesradioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC.Cet équipement doit être installé etutilisé en gardant une distance de 20cmou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et lecorps (à l’exception des extrémités :mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).

Page 54: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

54

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

2. SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Bluetooth*”.

4 Select the desired item to be set.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

Page 55: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

55

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch. (P.10)

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Phone”.

4 Select “Connect Phone”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

“Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN

Function Page

Registering a Bluetooth® device 56

Deleting a Bluetooth® device 57

Connecting a Bluetooth® device 58

Editing the Bluetooth® device in-formation 60

Bluetooth® system settings 62

DISPLAYING THE “Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN IN A DIFFERENT WAY

Page 56: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

56

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.(P.54)

2 Select “Add”.

When another Bluetooth® device is con-nected

To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,select “Yes”.

When 5 Bluetooth® devices have al-ready been registered

A registered device needs to be replaced.Select “Yes”, and select the device to bereplaced.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

3 When this screen is displayed, searchfor the device name displayed on thisscreen on the screen of yourBluetooth® device.

For details about operating the Bluetooth®

device, see the manual that comes with it.To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.

4 Register the Bluetooth® device usingyour Bluetooth® device.

A PIN-code is not required for SSP(Secure Simple Pairing) compatibleBluetooth® devices. Depending on thetype of Bluetooth® device being con-nected, a message confirming registrationmay be displayed on the Bluetooth®

device’s screen. Respond and operate theBluetooth® device according to the confir-mation message.

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DEVICE

Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices can be reg-istered.

Bluetooth® compatible phones (HFP)and audio players (AVP) can be regis-tered simultaneously.This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.

Page 57: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

57

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

5 Check that the following screen is dis-played when registration is complete.

The system waits for connection requestscoming from the registered device.

At this stage, the Bluetooth® functions arenot yet available.

6 Select “OK” when the connection sta-tus changes from “Connecting...” to“Connected”.

If an error message is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try again.

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.(P.54)

2 Select “Remove”.

3 Select the desired device.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

5 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

DELETING A Bluetooth® DEVICE

INFORMATION

● When deleting a Bluetooth® phone, thecontact data will be deleted at the sametime.

Page 58: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

58

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.(P.54)

2 Select the device to be connected.

Supported profile icons will be displayed.

: Phone

: Audio player

: Phone/“LEXUS App Suite” serviceThe profile icon for a currently connected

device will be displayed in color.Selecting a profile icon which is not cur-

rently connected will switch the connectionto the function.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

3 Select the desired connection.

When another Bluetooth® device is con-nected

To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,select “Yes”.

4 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the connection is com-plete.

If an error message is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try again.

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE

Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices (Phones(HFP) and audio players (AVP)) can beregistered.

If more than 1 Bluetooth® device hasbeen registered, select which device toconnect to.

If the desired Bluetooth® device is not onthe list, select “Add” to register thedevice. (P.56)

INFORMATION

●It may take time if the device connectionis carried out during Bluetooth® audioplayback.

●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

device being connected, it may be neces-sary to perform additional steps on thedevice.

Page 59: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

59

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

■ AUTO CONNECTION MODE

When the power switch is in ACCES-SORY or ON mode, the system searchesfor a nearby registered device.The system will connect with the registered

device that was last connected, if it isnearby.

■ CONNECTING MANUALLY

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch and select “Setup”.

2 Select “Bluetooth*”.

3 Follow the steps in “CONNECTING ABluetooth® DEVICE” from “STEP 2”.(P.58)

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

■ RECONNECTING THE Bluetooth®

PHONE

If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected onpurpose, such as turning it off, this does nothappen. Reconnect the Bluetooth® phonemanually.

To turn auto connection mode on, set“Bluetooth* Power” to on. (P.62)Leave the Bluetooth® device in a loca-tion where the connection can be estab-lished.

When the auto connection has failed or“Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, it isnecessary to connect Bluetooth® man-ually.

If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnecteddue to poor reception from theBluetooth® network when the powerswitch is in ACCESSORY or ONmode, the system automatically recon-nects the Bluetooth® phone.

Page 60: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

60

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.(P.54)

2 Select the desired device to be edited.

3 Select “Device Info”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

4 Confirm and change the Bluetooth®

device information.EDITING THE Bluetooth® DEVICE INFORMATION

The Bluetooth® device’s informationcan be displayed on the screen. The dis-played information can be edited.

No. Information

The name of the Bluetooth® device.Can be changed to a desired name.(P.61)

Select to set the Bluetooth® audioplayer connection method. (P.61)

Device address is unique to the de-vice and cannot be changed.

Phone number of the Bluetooth®

phone.

Compatibility profile of theBluetooth® device.

Select to reset all setup items.

Page 61: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

61

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

1 Select “Device Name”.

2 Enter the name and select “OK”.

1 Select “Connect Audio Player from”.

2 Select the desired connection method.

“Vehicle”: Select to connect the audio sys-tem to the audio player.“Device”: Select to connect the audio play-er to the audio system.Depending on the audio player, the

“Vehicle” or “Device” connection methodmay be best. As such, refer to the manualthat comes with the audio player.To reset the connection method, select

“Default”.

INFORMATION

●If 2 Bluetooth® devices have been regis-tered with the same device name, thedevices can be distinguished referring tothe device’s address.

●Depending on the type of phone, someinformation may not be displayed.

CHANGING A DEVICE NAME

INFORMATION

● Even if the device name is changed, thename registered in your Bluetooth®

device does not change.

SETTING AUDIO PLAYER CONNECTION METHOD

Page 62: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

62

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.(P.54)

2 Select “System Settings”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

“System Settings” SCREEN

The Bluetooth® settings can be con-firmed and changed.

No. Information Page

Select to set Bluetooth®

connection on/off. 63

Displays system name. Canbe changed to a desiredname.

63

PIN-code used when theBluetooth® device wasregistered. Can bechanged to a desired code.

63

Device address is unique tothe device and cannot bechanged.

Select to set the phone con-nection status display on/off.

Select to set the connectionstatus display of the audioplayer on/off.

Compatibility profile of thesystem

Select to reset all setupitems.

Page 63: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

63

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

1 Select “Bluetooth* Power”.When “Bluetooth* Power” is on:

The Bluetooth® device is automaticallyconnected when the power switch is in AC-CESSORY or ON mode.When “Bluetooth* Power” is off: The Bluetooth® device is disconnected,and the system will not connect to it nexttime.

1 Select “Bluetooth* Name”.

2 Enter a name and select “OK”.

1 Select “Bluetooth* PIN”.

2 Enter a PIN-code and select “OK”.*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

CHANGING “Bluetooth* Power”

INFORMATION

●While driving, the auto connection statecan be changed from off to on, but can-not be changed from on to off.

EDITING THE SYSTEM NAME

EDITING THE PIN-CODE

Page 64: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

64

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3. OTHER SETTINGS

1. GENERAL SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “General”.

4 Select the items to be set.

Settings are available for auto screenchange, operation sounds, etc.

Page 65: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

65

3. OTHER SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

GENERAL SETTINGS SCREEN No. Function

Select to change the time zone andset the daylight saving time and auto-matic adjustment of the clock by GPSon/off. (P.66)

Select to change the language.

Select to change the unit of measurefor distance.

Select to change the screen buttoncolor.

Select to change the keyboard lay-out.

Select to customize the startup/screen off images. (P.68)

Select to set automatic screenchanges from the audio/air condi-tioning control screen to the previousscreen to on/off. When set to on, thescreen will automatically return to theprevious screen from the audio/airconditioning control screen after 20seconds.

Select to set the selection sounds on/off.

Select to set the pointer sounds on/off.

Select to set the error sounds on/off.

Page 66: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

66

3. OTHER SETTINGS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “General Settings” screen.(P.64)

2 Select “Clock”.

3 Select the items to be set.

Select to adjust the pointer sound vol-ume.

Select to adjust the strength of thepull from the buttons to the pointer.

Select to delete personal data.(P.71)

Select to update software versions.For details, contact your Lexus deal-er.

Select to update “Gracenote” data-base versions. For details, contactyour Lexus dealer.

Select to display the software infor-mation. Notices related to third partysoftware used in this product are en-listed. (This includes instructions forobtaining such software, where appli-cable.)

No. Function CLOCK SETTINGS

Used for changing time zones and theon/off settings of daylight saving timeand automatic adjustment of the clockby GPS.

No. Function

Select to change the time zone.(P.67)

Select to set daylight saving time on/off.

Select to set automatic adjustment ofthe clock by GPS on/off. When set toon, the system will automatically ad-just the clock to the current position’stime zone when the vehicle moves toa different time zone.

When “Auto Adjust by GPS” isturned off, the clock can be manuallyadjusted. (P.67)

Page 67: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

67

3. OTHER SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ SETTING THE TIME ZONE

1 Select “Time Zone”.

2 Select the desired time zone.

If “Other” is selected, the zone can beadjusted manually. Select “+” or “-” toadjust the time zone.

■ MANUAL CLOCK SETTING

1 Display the “Clock” screen. ( P.66)

2 Select the items to be set.

*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 1:001:30 to 1:59 2:00

When “Auto Adjust by GPS” is turned“Off”, the clock can be manually adjust-ed.

No. Function

Select “+” to set the time forward onehour and “-” to set the time back onehour.

Select “+” to set the time forward oneminute and “-” to set the time backone minute.

Rounds to the nearest hour*.

Page 68: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

68

3. OTHER SETTINGS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “General Settings” screen.(P.64)

2 Select “Customize Images”.

3 Select the items to be set.

CUSTOMIZING THE STARTUP AND SCREEN OFF IMAGES

An image can be copied from a USBmemory and used as the startup andscreen off Images.When the power switch is in ACCES-SORY or ON mode, the initial screenwill be displayed. (P.34)When “Screen Off” on the “Display”screen is selected, the screen is turnedoff and the desired screen off image thatis set is displayed. (To turn the screen off:P.44) No. Function Page

Select to copy images froma USB memory. 69

Select to delete images. 71

Select to set an image as thestartup or screen off image. 70

Page 69: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

69

3. OTHER SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ TRANSFERRING IMAGES

1 Press the lid.

2 Open the cover and connect a USBmemory.

Turn on the power of the USB memory if itis not turned on.

3 Select “Copy from USB”.

4 Select the desired images from the listand then select “Copy”.

The selected image is displayed on theright side of the screen. If the selected

image file is broken or incompatible, will be displayed.The remaining number of image files that

can be transferred is displayed at the bot-tom of the screen.

5 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

Page 70: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

70

3. OTHER SETTINGS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ SETTING THE STARTUP ANDSCREEN OFF IMAGES

1 Select “Set Images”.

2 Select the desired image.

3 Select the desired items to be set.

INFORMATION

● When saving image files to a USB mem-ory to be transferred to the navigationsystem, save the images in a foldernamed “Image” (I-m-a-g-e, case sensi-tive). If a different folder name is used, thenavigation system will not recognize theimage files.

● The compatible file extensions are JPGand JPEG.

● An image’s file name, including file exten-sion, can be up to 32 characters.

● Image files of 10 MB or less can be trans-ferred.

● Up to 10 images can be transferred to thenavigation system.

No. Function

Select to set an image as the startupimage.

Select to set an image as the screenoff image.

Select to set an image as both thestartup and screen off image.

Page 71: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

71

3. OTHER SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAG-ES

1 Select “Delete Images”.

2 Select the images to be deleted and se-lect “Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

1 Display the “General Settings” screen.(P.64)

2 Select “Delete Personal Data”.

3 Select “Delete”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

Registered or changed personal settingswill be deleted or returned to their defaultconditions.For example:• General settings• Navigation settings • Audio settings• Phone settings• Lexus Enform settings

DELETING PERSONAL DATA

Page 72: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

72

3. OTHER SETTINGS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

2. VOICE SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Voice”.

4 Select the items to be set.Voice guidance etc. can be set.

INFORMATION

● “Voice Settings” screen can also be dis-played from the voice recognition topscreen. (P.266)

Page 73: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

73

3. OTHER SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

VOICE SETTINGS SCREEN No. Function

Select to adjust the volume of voiceguidance.

Select to set the voice guidance dur-ing route guidance on/off.

Select to set the voice guidance dur-ing audio/visual and/or air condi-tioning system use on/off.

Select to set the voice recognitionprompts on/off.

Select to train voice recognition.The voice command system adaptthe user accent.

When “On” is selected, expandedvoice commands can be operatedusing voice commands. (P.271)

Select to set the beep sound of navi-gation guidance.

Select to reset all setup items.

Page 74: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

74

3. OTHER SETTINGS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3. VEHICLE SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Vehicle”.

4 Select the desired item to be set.Settings are available for maintenance,vehicle customization, etc.

No. Function Page

Select to set mainte-nance. 75

Select to set vehiclecustomization.

“Owner’s Manual”

Select to set intuitiveparking assist-sensor.

“Owner’s Manual”

Select to set back cam-era guide line. 290

Page 75: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

75

3. OTHER SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Vehicle Settings” screen.(P.74)

2 Select “Maintenance”.

3 Select the desired item.

MAINTENANCE

When the navigation system is turnedon, the “Maintenance Reminder” screendisplays when it is time to replace a partor certain components. (P.35)

No. Function

Select to set the condition of parts orcomponents.

Select to add new information itemsseparately from provided ones.

Select to cancel all conditions whichhave been entered.

Select to reset the items which haveexpired conditions.

Select to call the registered dealer.

Select to register/edit dealer infor-mation. (P.77)

When set to on, the indicator will illu-minate. The system is set to givemaintenance information with the“Maintenance Reminder” screen.(P.35)

INFORMATION

● When the vehicle needs to be serviced,the screen button color will change toorange.

Page 76: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

76

3. OTHER SETTINGS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select the desired part or componentscreen button.

2 Set the conditions.

3 Select “OK” after entering the condi-tions.

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SETTING

No. Function

Select to enter the next maintenancedate.

Select to enter the driving distanceuntil the next maintenance check.

Select to cancel the conditions whichhave been entered.

Select to reset the conditions whichhave expired.

INFORMATION

● For scheduled maintenance information,refer to “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/ScheduledMaintenance”.

● Depending on driving or road conditions,the actual date and distance that mainte-nance should be performed may differfrom the stored date and distance in thesystem.

Page 77: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

77

3. OTHER SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Set Dealer”.

2 Select the desired item to search for thelocation. (P.105)

The editing dealer screen appears aftersetting the location.

3 Select the items to be edited.DEALER SETTING

Dealer information can be registered inthe system. With dealer information reg-istered, route guidance to the dealer isavailable.

No. Function Page

Select to enter the name ofa dealer. 78

Select to enter the name ofa dealer member. 78

Select to set the location. 78

Select to enter the phonenumber. 78

Select to delete the dealerinformation displayed onthe screen.

Select to set the displayeddealer as a destination. 121

Page 78: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

78

3. OTHER SETTINGS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ EDITING DEALER OR CONTACTNAME

1 Select “Edit” next to “Dealer” or“Contact”.

2 Enter the name and select “OK”.

■ EDITING THE LOCATION

1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”.

2 Scroll the map to the desired point(P.92) and select “OK”.

■ EDITING PHONE NUMBER

1 Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”.

2 Enter the phone number and select“OK”.

Page 79: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

79

3. OTHER SETTINGS

2

BASIC

FUN

CTIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Page 80: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

80

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.04 19:41

1. QUICK REFERENCE .............................. 82

MAP SCREEN............................................................. 82

NAVIGATION OPTIONS SCREEN ............. 84

2. MAP SCREEN OPERATION ............... 85

CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY..................... 85

MAP SCALE ............................................................... 86

ORIENTATION OF THE MAP.......................... 88

SWITCHING THE MAP MODE....................... 89

SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION...................... 91

ADJUSTING LOCATION IN SMALL INCREMENTS......................................................... 92

3. MAP SCREEN INFORMATION......... 93

DISPLAYING MAP INFORMATION ............ 93

DISPLAYING INFORMATION ABOUT THE ICON WHERE THE CURSOR IS SET................................................................................. 97

STANDARD MAP ICONS ................................... 99

4. TRAFFIC INFORMATION .................. 100

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION ON THE MAP........................................................ 103

1. DESTINATION SEARCHSCREEN.................................................... 105

2. SEARCH OPERATION ......................... 107

SELECTING SEARCH AREA.......................... 108

SETTING HOME AS DESTINATION........... 109

SETTING PRESET DESTINATIONS AS DESTINATION ..................................................... 109

SEARCHING BY ADDRESS.............................. 110

SEARCHING BY POINT OF INTEREST ....... 111

DESTINATION SEARCH BY DESTINATION ASSIST ..................................... 116

SEARCHING FROM PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS.................................................... 116

SEARCHING BY ADDRESS BOOK.............. 117

SEARCHING BY EMERGENCY..................... 117

SEARCHING BY INTERSECTION AND FREEWAY ................................................................ 118

SEARCHING BY MAP.......................................... 119

SEARCHING BY COORDINATES .............. 120

3. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ....... 121

STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE..................... 121

PAUSING GUIDANCE....................................... 124

1 BASIC OPERATION 2 DESTINATION SEARCH

3

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Page 81: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

3

81

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.04 19:41

1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN .......... 125

SCREEN FOR ROUTE GUIDANCE ............ 125

ROUTE OVERVIEW ............................................. 127

DURING FREEWAY DRIVING....................... 128

WHEN APPROACHING INTERSECTION................................................... 130

TURN LIST SCREEN.............................................. 130

TURN-BY-TURN ARROW SCREEN ............ 131

2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS ............................................... 132

3. EDITING ROUTE..................................... 133

ADDING DESTINATIONS ................................ 134

REORDERING DESTINATIONS.................... 135

DELETING DESTINATIONS ............................ 135

SETTING ROUTE PREFERENCES................ 136

SELECTING ROUTE TYPE ............................... 136

DETOUR SETTING ................................................ 137

STARTING FROM ADJACENT ROAD...... 138

1. MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS.......... 139

SETTING UP HOME ............................................. 140

SETTING UP PRESET DESTINATIONS...... 142

SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK ..................... 144

SETTING UP AREAS TO AVOID .................. 147

DELETING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS................................................... 150

1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS................................................. 151

SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION SETTINGS................................................................ 152

2. TRAFFIC SETTINGS ............................... 157

SCREEN FOR TRAFFIC SETTINGS............. 158

AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC ..................................... 159

1. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM) .................................................. 160

LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM .................................................................... 160

2. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERED AREA................................. 163

MAP INFORMATION .......................................... 163

ABOUT THE MAP DATA ................................... 164

3 ROUTE GUIDANCE

4 MEMORY POINTS

5 SETUP

6 TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Page 82: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

82

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1. BASIC OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE

MAP SCREEN

To display this screen, press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select“Nav” on the “Menu” screen.

No. Name Function Page

2D north up, 2Dheading up or 3Dheading up sym-bol

Indicates whether the map orientation is set tonorth-up or heading-up. The letter(s) beside thissymbol indicate the vehicle’s heading direction(e.g. N for north). In 3D map, only a heading-upview is available.

88

Options button Select to display the “Navigation Options” screen. 84

“GPS” mark (GlobalPositioningSystem)

Shows that the vehicle is receiving signals fromthe GPS. 160

Traffic indicator

Shows that traffic information is received. Selectto start voice guidance for traffic information.When traffic information is received via HD, HDmark is displayed on the right.

100

Scale indicator This figure indicates the map scale. 86

Page 83: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

83

1. BASIC OPERATION

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Zoom in/out button

Select to magnify or reduce the map scale. Wheneither button is selected, the map scale indicatorbar appears at the bottom of the screen.

86

Footprint map button Select to display the footprint map screen. 86

Current position button Select to display the current position address.

Voice guidance button Select to repeat voice guidance. 132

Destination button Select to display the “Destination” screen. 105

Speed limit icon Indicates the speed limit on the current road. Thedisplay of the speed limit icon can be set to on/off. 93

Route information bar

Displays the current street name, or the distancewith the estimated travel time/arrival time to thedestination. The route information bar fills fromleft to right as the vehicle progresses on the route. 126

Route information button

Select to change the display between the currentstreet name and the distance with the estimatedtravel/arrival time.

No. Name Function Page

Page 84: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

84

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

NAVIGATION OPTIONS SCREEN

The navigation options allow you to change map configurations, display/hide POIicons, and edit the navigation routes. To display the “Navigation Options” screen,press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, select “Nav” on the “Menu” screen,and select “Options” on the map screen.

No. Function Page

Select to display the desired map configuration. 89

Select to set display of the map information such as POI icons, routetrace, speed limit, etc. 93

Select to display the map version and coverage area. 163

Select to edit the set route. 133

Select to pause or resume route guidance. 124

Select to display the overview of the entire route. 127

Page 85: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

85

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

2. MAP SCREEN OPERATION

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Nav”.

3 Check that the current position map isdisplayed.

CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY

To correct the current position manually:P.155

INFORMATION

● While driving, the current position markis fixed on the screen and the map moves.

● The current position is automatically setas the vehicle receives signals from theGPS (Global Positioning System). If thecurrent position is not correct, it is auto-matically corrected after the vehiclereceives signals from the GPS.

● After the battery disconnection, or on anew vehicle, the current position may notbe correct. As soon as the systemreceives signals from the GPS, the cor-rect current position is displayed.

Page 86: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

86

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select or to change thescale of the map screen.

The scale indicator bar appears at the bot-tom of the screen.

Select and hold or to continuechanging the scale of the map screen.The scale of the map screen can also be

changed by selecting the scale bar directly.This function is not available while driving.

1 Select on the map screen.

2 Check that the footprint map is dis-played.

To return to the normal map display, select

.

MAP SCALE

INFORMATION

● Press the “ ” button on the RemoteTouch to zoom in on the map screen andthe “ ” button to zoom out.

● The map scale is displayed above thezoom in button at the bottom left of thescreen.

● In areas where the footprint map is avail-

able the map scale changes from

to when at the minimum range.

FOOTPRINT MAP

For areas covered by the footprint map(some major cities), a footprint map on ascale of 75 ft. (25 m) can be selected.When the map is scaled down to 150 ft.

(50 m), changes to and canbe selected to display the footprint map.

INFORMATION

● If the map or the current position ismoved to the area which is not coveredby the footprint map, the screen scaleautomatically changes to 150 ft. (50 m).

● On the footprint map, a one way street is

displayed by .● Scrolling on the footprint map is not avail-

able while driving.

Building footprints in the database werecreated and provided by NAVTEQ.

Page 87: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

87

1. BASIC OPERATION

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

To display the normal map, select .

1 Select an arrow to rotate.

3D CITY MODEL MAP

A 3D city model map can be displayedfor some areas in major cities when themap scale is 700 ft. (200 m) or less onthe 3D map screen.

INFORMATION

● The 3D city model map can be set thedisplay on/off. (P.151)

ROTATING 3D MAP

3D map and 3D city model map can berotated when arrows appear around thecursor while scrolling.

INFORMATION

● The viewing angle of the 3D map can bechanged. (P.154)

Page 88: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

88

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select , or .

North-up screen

Heading-up screen

3D screen

: North-up symbolRegardless of the direction of vehicle travel,north is always up.

: Heading-up symbolThe direction of vehicle travel is always up.

: 3D Heading-up symbolThe direction of vehicle travel is always up.The letter(s) beside this symbol indicate the

vehicle’s heading direction (e.g. N fornorth).

ORIENTATION OF THE MAP

The orientation of the map can bechanged between 2D north-up, 2Dheading-up and 3D heading-up by se-lecting the orientation symbol displayedat the top left of the screen.

Page 89: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

89

1. BASIC OPERATION

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Options” on the map screen.

2 Select “Map Mode”.

3 Select the desired configuration button.

Depending on the conditions, certainscreen configuration buttons cannot beselected.

SWITCHING THE MAP MODE No. Function Page

Select to display the singlemap screen. 90

Select to display the dualmap screen. 90

Select to display the com-pass mode screen. 91

Select to display the turn listscreen. 130

Select to display the freewayexit list screen. 128

Select to display the inter-section guidance screen orthe guidance screen on thefreeway.

130

Select to display the turn-by-turn arrow screen. 131

Page 90: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

90

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ MAP ONLY

■ DUAL MAP

The map on the left is the main map.

Editing right map

1 Select any point on the right side map.

2 Select the desired item.

When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

The right side map can be edited.

No. Function Page

Select to change the orien-tation of the map. 88

Select to display POI icons. 94

Select to show traffic infor-mation. 100

Select to display eDestina-tion icons. 374

Select to change the mapscale. 86

Page 91: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

91

1. BASIC OPERATION

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ COMPASS

Information about the destination, cur-rent position and a compass is displayedon the screen.

INFORMATION

● The destination mark is displayed in thedirection of the destination. When driv-ing, refer to the longitude and latitudecoordinates, and the compass, to makesure that the vehicle is headed in thedirection of the destination.

● When the vehicle travels out of the cover-age area, the guidance screen changes tothe whole compass mode screen.

SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION

Use the scroll feature to move the de-sired point to the center of the screen forlooking at a point on the map that is dif-ferent from the current position.

No. Information/Function

Cursor mark

Distance from the current position tothe cursor mark.

Select to set as a destination.When selecting “Go to ” on the fol-lowing map screen, the navigationsystem performs a search for theroute. (P.121)If a destination has already been set,“Go to ” and “Add to Route” will bedisplayed.“Go to ”: Select to delete the exist-ing destination(s) and set a new one.“Add to Route”: Select to add a desti-nation.

Select to register as a memory point.To change the icon, name, etc.:P.144

Select to return to the current posi-tion.

Page 92: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

92

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

To scroll over the map screen, place thecursor mark in the desired position andthen press and hold the Remote Touchknob. The map will continue scrolling in thatdirection until the knob is released.

1 Select one of the 8 directional arrows tomove the cursor to the desired pointand then select “OK”.

ADJUSTING LOCATION IN SMALL INCREMENTS

The cursor location can be adjusted insmall increments when “AdjustLocation” is selected on the setting mapscreen. Also, when changing the location ofmemory points on the editing screen(P.146) and adjusting the current po-sition mark manually on the “Calibration”screen (P.155), 8 directional arrowsmay appear for this purpose.

Page 93: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

93

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3. MAP SCREEN INFORMATION

1 Select “Options” on the map screen.

2 Select “Map Information”.

3 Select the desired items to be displayed.

When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

DISPLAYING MAP INFORMATION

Information such as POI icons, routetrace, speed limit, etc. can be displayedon the map screen.

No. Function Page

Select to display the select-ed POI icons.

Select to select or changePOI icons. 94

Select to display eDestina-tion icons. 374

Select to display route trace. 96

Select to display traffic infor-mation. 100

Select to display speed limiticon.

Page 94: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

94

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Map Information” screen.(P.93)

2 Select “Select POI”.

When the POI icons to be displayed on themap screen have already been set,“Change POI” is displayed.

3 Select the desired POI category and se-lect “OK”.

SELECTING THE POI ICONS

No. Information/Function Page

Displays up to 5 selectedPOI icons on the mapscreen.

Select to cancel the select-ed POI icons.

Displays up to 6 POI iconsas favorite POI categories 153

Select to display other POIcategories if the desiredPOIs cannot be found onthe screen.

95

Select to search for thenearest POIs. 95

Page 95: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

95

1. BASIC OPERATION

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ SELECTING OTHER POI ICONSTO BE DISPLAYED

1 Select “Other POIs”.

2 Select the desired POI categories andselect “OK”.

“List All Categories”: Select to display allPOI categories. To add more POI catego-ries, select “More”.

■ DISPLAYING THE LOCAL POILIST

1 Select “Find Local POI”.

2 Select the desired POI.

“Near...”: Select to search for POIs near thecurrent position or along the route.

3 Check that the selected POI is dis-played on the map screen. (P.91)

POIs that are within 20 miles (32 km) ofthe current position will be listed fromamong the selected categories.

Page 96: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

96

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

When “Near...” is selected

1 Select the desired item.

“Near Here”: Select to search for POIsnear the current position.“Along My Route”: Select to search forPOIs along the route.

1 Display the “Map Information” screen.(P.93)

2 Select “Route Trace”.The “Route Trace” indicator illuminates and

the route trace starts.

3 Check that the traveled line is displayed.

ROUTE TRACE

The traveled route can be stored and re-traced on the map screen. This feature isavailable when the map scale is 30 miles(50 km) or less.

Page 97: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

97

1. BASIC OPERATION

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ STOP RECORDING THE ROUTETRACE

1 Select “Route Trace” again.

2 A confirmation screen will be displayed. “Yes”: Select to keep the recordedroute trace.“No”: Select to erase the recordedroute trace.

1 Place the cursor over an icon.

2 Select “Info”.

POI information

Memory point information

INFORMATION

● The traveled route can be stored up to124 miles (200 km).

DISPLAYING INFORMATION ABOUT THE ICON WHERE THE CURSOR IS SET

When the cursor is placed over an iconon the map screen, the name bar is dis-played on the upper part of the screen. If“Info” appears on the right side of thename bar, detailed information can bedisplayed.

Page 98: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

98

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Destination information

Traffic information

No. Function

Select to register as a memory point.To change the icon, name, etc.:P.144

Select to set as a destination.

Select to call the registered number.

Select to delete destination or memo-ry point.

Select to display the edit memorypoint screen.

Select to display detailed information.

INFORMATION

● Even when traffic information is not cur-rently being received, traffic informationand “Info” will be displayed for a whileafter traffic information has beenreceived.

Page 99: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

99

1. BASIC OPERATION

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

STANDARD MAP ICONS

Icon Name

Island

Park

Industry

Business facility

Airport

Military

University

Hospital

Stadium

Shopping mall

Golf

Page 100: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

100

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

4. TRAFFIC INFORMATION

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Info”.

3 Select “Traffic Incidents”.

4 Select the desired item.Traffic data can be received via HD orLEXUS App Suite to display traffic infor-mation on the map screen.

No. Function Page

Select to display a list ofcurrent traffic information. 101

Select to display a map withpredictive traffic data. 102

Page 101: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

101

1. BASIC OPERATION

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Traffic” screen. (P.100)

2 Select “Traffic Event List”.

3 Select the desired traffic information.

“On Current Road”: Select to display trafficinformation for the current road.“On Current Route”: Select to display traf-fic information for the set route.When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

4 Check that the traffic information is dis-played.

“Detail”: Select to display detailed traffic in-formation.

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION

A list of current traffic information canbe displayed along with information onthe incident’s distance and position rela-tive to the vehicle.

Page 102: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

102

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Traffic” screen. (P.100)

2 Select “Predictive Traffic Map”.

3 Scroll the map to the desired point andset the time of predictive traffic informa-tion. Then select “Info”.

The time of the predictive traffic informa-tion can be displayed in 15-minute steps upto +45 minutes.

“+”: Moves the time forward 15 minutes.“-”: Moves the time back 15 minutes.

4 Check that the traffic information is dis-played.

“Detail”: Select to display detailed traffic in-formation.

DISPLAYING PREDICTIVE TRAFFIC INFORMATION

A map with predictive traffic data can bedisplayed.

Page 103: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

103

1. BASIC OPERATION

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Options” on the map screen.

2 Select “Map Information”.

3 Select “Traffic Information”.

When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

4 Check that the traffic information is dis-played.

On the map screen

On the freeway information screen

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION ON THE MAP

Page 104: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

104

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

No. Information/Function

The icons show traffic incident, roadrepair, traffic obstacles, etc. Select todisplay traffic information and startvoice guidance for the traffic infor-mation.

The color of the arrow changes de-pending on the traffic information re-ceived.

The indicator is displayed as follows.

: Traffic information hasbeen received.

: Traffic information hasbeen received via HD.No icon: Any traffic information hasnot been received.

Page 105: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

105

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

1. DESTINATION SEARCH SCREEN

The “Destination” screen enables to search for a destination. To display the “Destina-tion” screen, press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, and select “Nav” on the“Menu” screen. Then select “Dest.” on the map screen.

No. Function Page

Select to search for a destination by address. 110

Select to search for a destination by point of interest. 111

Select to search for a destination by online database. 367

Select to search for a destination via the Lexus Enform with Safety Con-nect response center. 372

Select to search for a destination from previously set destinations. 116

Select to search for a destination from a registered entry in “AddressBook”. 117

Select to search for a destination from emergency service points. 117

Select to search for a destination by intersection or freeway entrance/exit. 118

Select to search for a destination by the last displayed map. 119

Page 106: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

106

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Select to search for a destination by coordinates. 120

Select to set a destination by home. 109

Select to set a destination from preset destinations. 109

Select to delete set destinations. 135

No. Function Page

Page 107: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

107

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

2. SEARCH OPERATION

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Nav”.

3 Select “Dest.”.

4 Search for a destination.

There are different kinds of methods tosearch for a destination. (P.105)

Page 108: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

108

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

5 Select “Go” when the confirm destina-tion screen is displayed.

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Address”, “Point of Interest” or“Intersection & Freeway”.

3 Select “Select State/Province” or“Change State/Province”.

If a state (province) has not been selectedyet, “Select State/Province” is displayed.

4 Select the desired state (province).

To change countries, select the “UnitedStates”, “Canada” or “Mexico” tab.For map database information and updates:P.163

No. Function

Select to adjust the position in small-er increments. (P.92)

Select to register as a memory point.

Select to search for the route. (P.121)If a destination has already been set,“Go Directly” and “Add to Route”will be displayed.“Go Directly”: Select to delete theexisting destination(s) and set a newone.“Add to Route”: Select to add a des-tination.

Select to call the registered number.

SELECTING SEARCH AREA

The selected state (province) can bechanged to set a destination from adifferent state (province) by using“Address”, “Point of Interest” or“Intersection & Freeway”.

Page 109: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

109

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Go Home”.The navigation system performs a search

for the route and the entire route map isdisplayed. (P.121)

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select any of the preset destination but-tons (1-5).

The navigation system performs a searchfor the route and the entire route map isdisplayed. (P.121)

SETTING HOME AS DESTINATION

To use this function, it is necessary toregister a home address. (P.140)

SETTING PRESET DESTINATIONS AS DESTINATION

To use this function, it is necessary toregister preset destinations to the presetscreen buttons (1-5). (P.142)

Page 110: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

110

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Address”.

3 Select the desired search method.

1 Select “City”.

2 Enter a city name and select “OK”.

“Last 5 Cities”: Select the city name fromthe list of the last 5 cities.

3 Select the desired city name.

4 Enter a street name and select “OK”.

5 Select the desired street name.

6 Enter a house number and select “OK”. If the same address exists, the address list

screen will be displayed. Select the desiredaddress.

SEARCHING BY ADDRESS

There are 2 methods to search for a des-tination by address.

No. Function Page

Select to search by city. 110

Select to search by streetaddress. 111

SEARCHING BY CITY

Page 111: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

111

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Street Address”.

2 Enter a house number and select “OK”.

3 Enter a street name and select “OK”.

4 Select the desired street name.

5 Enter a city name and select “OK”.

6 Select the desired city name. If the same address exists, the address list

screen will be displayed. Select the desiredaddress.

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Point of Interest”.

3 Select the desired search method.

SEARCHING BY STREET ADDRESS

INFORMATION

● A street name can be searched usingonly the body part of its name.For example: S WESTERN AVE• A search can be performed by entering

“S WESTERN AVE”, “WESTERN AVE”or “WESTERN”.

SEARCHING BY POINT OF INTEREST

There are 4 methods to search for a des-tination by Points of Interest.

No. Function Page

Select to search by name. 112

Select to search by catego-ry. 114

Select to search by phonenumber. 115

Select to search by eDesti-nation. 376

Page 112: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

112

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Name”.

2 Enter a POI name and select “OK”.

3 Select the desired POI.

When entering the name of a specific POI,and there are 2 or more sites with the samename, the list screen will be displayed.Select the desired POI.

■ SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH

1 Select “City”.

2 Enter a city name and select “OK”.

“Any City”: Select to cancel the city setting.

3 Select the desired city name.

4 Select the desired POI.

■ SELECTING FROM THE CATEGO-RIES

1 Select “Category”.

2 Select the desired category.

If there is more than 1 detailed item of theselected category, the detailed list will bedisplayed.

“List All Categories”: Select to display allPOI categories.

3 Select the desired POI.

SEARCHING BY NAME

No. Function Page

Select to search for POI inthe desired city. 112

Select to search for POIfrom the category list. 112

Select to search for POI us-ing online database. 113

INFORMATION

● To search for a facility name using multi-ple search words, put a space betweeneach word.

Page 113: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

113

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ SEARCHING FOR POI USINGWEB SEARCH

1 Select “” next to “Web Search” to se-lect a search engine.

2 Select the desired search engine icon.

The selected search engine icon will be dis-played on the top center of the POI listscreen.

3 Select the search engine icon.

Accessing to a search engineFor the procedure on how to conduct asearch via a search engine, go to“SETTING A DESTINATION USINGLEXUS App Suite” (P.368), andfollow the steps from 3 onward.

Page 114: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

114

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Category”.

2 Select the desired search point.

3 Select the desired POI category.

If there is more than 1 detailed item of theselected category, the detailed list will bedisplayed.

“List All Categories”: Select to display allPOI categories.“Favorite POI Categories”: Select to usethe 6 POIs that have been previously set.(P.153)

4 Select the desired POI.

“Web Search”: Select to search for POI us-ing online database. (P.113)

SEARCHING BY CATEGORY

No. Function

Select to set the search point fromnear the current position.

Select to search for POIs along theset route.

Select to set the search point fromnear a city center. (P.115)

Select to set the search point fromnear a destination.

INFORMATION

● The names of POIs located withinapproximately 200 miles (320 km) fromthe selected search point can be dis-played.

Page 115: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

115

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

When “Near a City Center in XX*” is se-lected

1 Select “Near a City Center in XX”.

2 Enter a city name and select “OK”.“Last 5 Cities”: Select the city name fromthe list of the last 5 cities.

3 Select the desired city name.

4 Select “OK” when the city center mapscreen is displayed.

5 Follow the steps from 3 onward in“SEARCHING BY CATEGORY”.(P.114)

*: XX represents the selected search areaname.

1 Select “Phone #”.

2 Enter a phone number and select “OK”. If there is more than 1 site with the same

number, the list screen will be displayed.

INFORMATION

● If the navigation system has never beenused, selecting the city name from “Last 5Cities” will not be available.

SEARCHING BY PHONE NUMBER

INFORMATION

● If there is no match for the entered phonenumber, a list of identical numbers withdifferent area codes will be displayed.

Page 116: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

116

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Previous Destinations”.

3 Select the desired destination.

“Previous Start Point”: Select to display thestart point map of the previous guidedroute.“Delete”: Select to delete the previous des-tination. (P.150)

DESTINATION SEARCH BY DESTINATION ASSIST

The destination can be searched by call-ing an operator of Destination Assist.You can request either a specific busi-ness, address, or ask for help locatingyour desired destination. (P.372)

SEARCHING FROM PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS

INFORMATION

● The previous start point and up to 100previously set destinations are displayedon the screen.

Page 117: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

117

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Address Book”.

3 Select the desired address book entry.

“Options”: Select to register or edit addressbook entries. (P.145)

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Emergency”.

3 Select the desired emergency category.

4 Select the desired destination.

SEARCHING BY ADDRESS BOOK

To use this function, it is necessary toregister an address book entry.(P.144)

SEARCHING BY EMERGENCY

INFORMATION

● The navigation system does not guide inareas where route guidance is unavail-able. (P.161)

Page 118: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

118

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Intersection & Freeway”.

3 Select the desired method.

1 Select “Intersection”.

2 Enter the name of the first intersectingstreet which is located near the destina-tion and select “OK”.

3 Select the desired street name.

4 Enter the name of the second intersect-ing street and select “OK”.

5 Select the desired street name.

If the 2 streets cross at more than 1 inter-section in a city, the list of intersections willbe displayed.

SEARCHING BY INTERSECTION AND FREEWAY

There are 2 methods to search for a des-tination by Intersection & Freeway.

No. Function Page

Select to search by inter-section. 118

Select to search by freewayentrance/exit. 119

SEARCHING BY INTERSECTION

Page 119: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

119

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Freeway Entrance / Exit”.

2 Enter a freeway name and select “OK”.

3 Select the desired freeway.

4 Select “Entrance” or “Exit”.

5 Enter a freeway entrance or exit nameand select “OK”.

6 Select the desired entrance or exitname.

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Map”.

3 Scroll the map to the desired point andselect “Go to ”.

“Adjust Location”: Select to adjust the posi-tion in smaller increments. (P.92) If a destination has already been set, “Go to

” and “Add to Route” will be displayed.“Go to ”: Select to delete the existing des-tination(s) and set a new one.“Add to Route”: Select to add a destination.The navigation system performs a search

for the route and the entire route map isdisplayed. (P.121)

SEARCHING BY FREEWAY ENTRANCE/EXIT

INFORMATION

● Be sure to use the complete name of thefreeway or highway, including the hyphen,when entering the destination. Freewaysand interstates use an “I” (I-405). UShighways use the state designation beforethe number (CA-118).

SEARCHING BY MAP

By selecting “Map” the last displayed lo-cation is displayed again on the mapscreen. You can search for a destinationfrom this map.

Page 120: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

120

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Destination” screen.(P.107)

2 Select “Coordinates”.

3 Enter the latitude and longitude and se-lect “OK”.

SEARCHING BY COORDINATES

Page 121: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

121

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE

1 Select “OK” to start guidance.

When the destination is set, the entireroute map from the current position tothe destination is displayed.

STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE

No. Information/Function

Select the desired route from 3 pos-sible routes. (P.122)

Select to change the route.(P.123)

Select to display a list of the turns re-quired to reach the destination.(P.123)

Current position

Destination point

Type of route and its distance

Distance of the entire route

Select to start guidance.If “OK” is selected and held until abeep sounds, demo mode will start.Press the “HOME” or “MENU”button on the Remote Touch to enddemo mode.

WARNING

● Be sure to obey traffic regulations andkeep road conditions in mind while driv-ing. If a traffic sign on the road has beenchanged, the route guidance may notindicate such changed information.

INFORMATION

● The route for returning may not be thesame as that for going.

● The route guidance to the destinationmay not be the shortest route or a routewithout traffic congestion.

● Route guidance may not be available ifthere is no road data for the specifiedlocation.

● When setting the destination on a mapwith a scale more than 0.5 mile (800 m),the map scale changes to 0.5 mile (800m) automatically. If this occurs, set thedestination again.

● If a destination that is not located on aroad is set, the vehicle will be guided tothe point on a road nearest to the destina-tion. The road nearest to the selectedpoint is set as the destination.

Page 122: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

122

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Three Routes”.

2 Select the desired route.

■ DISPLAYING 3 ROUTES INFOR-MATION

1 Select “Info”.

2 Check that the “Information for ThreeRoutes” screen is displayed.

3 ROUTES SELECTION

No. Function

Select to display the quickest route.

Select to display the alternativeroute.

Select to display the route that is theshortest distance to the set destina-tion.

Select to display the informationabout the 3 routes. (P.122)

No. Information

Time necessary for the entire trip

Distance of the entire trip

Distance of the toll road

Distance of the freeway

Distance of the ferry trip

Page 123: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

123

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Turn List”.

2 Check that the turn list is displayed.

1 Select “Edit Route”.

2 Select the desired item.

DISPLAYING TURN LIST

A list of turn information from the cur-rent position to the destination can bedisplayed.

No. Information

Current position

Distance to the next turn

Turn direction at the intersection

Select to display the map of the se-lected point.

INFORMATION

● However, not all road names on the routemay appear on the list. If a road changesits name without requiring a turn (such ason a street that runs through 2 or morecities), the name change will not appearon the list. The street names will be dis-played in order from the starting point,along with the distance to the next turn.

EDITING ROUTE

Destinations can be added, reorderedor deleted, and conditions for the routeto the destination can be changed.

No. Function Page

Select to add destinations. 134

Select to delete destina-tions. 135

Select to reorder destina-tions. 135

Select to set route prefer-ences. 136

Select to change routetype. 136

Page 124: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

124

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Options” on the map screen.

2 Select “Pause Guidance”.

1 Select “Resume Guidance”.

INFORMATION

● Even if the “Freeways” indicator isdimmed, the route cannot avoid includinga freeway in some cases. (P.136)

● If the calculated route includes a trip byferry, the route guidance shows a searoute. After traveling by ferry, the currentposition may be incorrect. Upon recep-tion of GPS signals, it is automaticallycorrected.

PAUSING GUIDANCE

RESUMING GUIDANCE

Page 125: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

125

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN

During the route guidance, varioustypes of guidance screens can be dis-played depending on conditions.

SCREEN FOR ROUTE GUIDANCE

No. Information

Distance to the next turn and an ar-row indicating the turning direction

Guidance route

Current position

Current street name or route infor-mation

INFORMATION

● If the vehicle goes off the guidance route,the route is searched again.

● For some areas, the roads have not beencompletely digitized in our database. Forthis reason, the route guidance mayselect a road that should not be traveledon.

● When arriving at the set destination thedestination name will be displayed on theupper part of the screen.

Page 126: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

126

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select the route information bar ( ) orthe route information button ( ) tochange the display of the route informa-tion bar.

CHANGING ROUTE INFORMATION BAR

When the vehicle is on the guidanceroute, the route information bar displaysthe current street name or the distancewith the estimated travel/arrival time tothe destination.

No. Information

Select to change the display be-tween the estimated travel time andthe estimated arrival time.

Select to change the display be-tween the current street name andthe distance with the estimated trav-el/arrival time.

INFORMATION

● When the vehicle is on the guidanceroute, the distance measured along theroute is displayed. Travel time and arrivaltime are calculated based on the averagespeed for the specified speed limit.

● When the vehicle gets off the guidanceroute, the arrow facing the destination isdisplayed instead of the estimated travel/arrival time.

● The route information bar fills from left toright as the vehicle progresses on theroute.

Page 127: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

127

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select the route information bar.

2 Check that the list of the distance andtime is displayed.

By selecting one of the number buttons, thedesired route information is displayed.

1 Select “Options” on the map screen.

2 Select “Route Overview”.

3 Check that the entire route map is dis-played.

For details about this screen: P.121

DISTANCE AND TIME TO DESTINATION

When driving on the guidance routewith more than 1 destination set, a list ofthe distance with estimated travel/arriv-al time from the current position to eachdestination is displayed.

ROUTE OVERVIEW

The entire route from the current posi-tion to the destination can be displayedduring the route guidance.

Page 128: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

128

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

DURING FREEWAY DRIVING

During freeway driving, the freeway exitinformation screen will be displayed.

No./Icon Information/Function

Distance and time from the currentposition to the road traffic facilities.

Name of the road traffic facilities.

POIs that are close to a freeway exit

Select to display the selected map ofthe exit vicinity.

Select to scroll to farther road trafficfacilities.

Select to scroll to closer road trafficfacilities.

WHEN APPROACHING FREEWAY EXIT OR JUNCTION

When the vehicle approaches an exit orjunction, the freeway guidance screenwill be displayed.

No. Information/Function

Next exit or junction name

Distance from the current position tothe exit or junction

Select to hide the freeway guidancescreen. To return to the freeway

guidance screen, select .

Remaining distance bar to the guid-ance point

Page 129: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

129

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

TOLLGATE GUIDANCE

When the vehicle approaches a tollgate,the tollgate view will be displayed.

No. Information/Function

Distance from the current position tothe tollgate

Select to hide the tollgate guidancescreen. To return to the tollgate

guidance screen, select .

Remaining distance bar to the guid-ance point

REAL FREEWAY JUNCTION VIEW

When the vehicle approaches a junc-tion, the junction view with signage willbe displayed.

No. Information/Function

Next junction or street name

Select to hide the real freeway junc-tion view. To return to the real free-

way junction view, select .

Distance from the current position tothe next junction

Remaining distance bar to the guid-ance point

Page 130: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

130

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Turn List” on the “Map Mode”screen. (P.89)

2 Check that the turn list screen is dis-played.

WHEN APPROACHING INTERSECTION

When the vehicle approaches an inter-section, the intersection guidancescreen will be displayed.

No. Information/Function

Next street name

Select to hide the intersection guid-ance screen. To return to the inter-section guidance screen, select

.

Distance to the intersection

Remaining distance bar to the guid-ance point

TURN LIST SCREEN

No. Information

Turn direction

Distance between turns

Next street or destination name

Page 131: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

131

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Turn-by-Turn Arrow” on the“Map Mode” screen. (P.89)

2 Check that the turn-by-turn arrowscreen is displayed.

TURN-BY-TURN ARROW SCREEN

On this screen, information about thenext turn on the guidance route can bedisplayed.

No. Information

Exit number or street name

Turn direction

Distance to the next turn

Page 132: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

132

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS

As the vehicle approaches an intersec-tion, or point, where maneuvering thevehicle is necessary, the system’s voiceguidance will provide various messages.

WARNING

● Be sure to obey the traffic regulations andkeep the road condition in mind espe-cially when you are driving on IPD roads(roads that are not completely digitized inour database). The route guidance maynot have the updated information such asthe direction of a one way street.

INFORMATION

● If a voice guidance command cannot be

heard, select on the map screen tohear it again.

● To adjust the voice guidance volume: P.73

● Voice guidance may be made early orlate.

● If the system cannot determine the cur-rent position correctly, you may not hearvoice guidance or may not see the mag-nified intersection on the screen.

Page 133: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

133

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

3. EDITING ROUTE

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Nav”.

3 Select “Options”.

4 Select “Edit Route”.

Page 134: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

134

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

5 Select the item to be set.

6 Check that the entire route map is dis-played. (P.121)

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P.133)

2 Select “Add”.

3 Search for an additional destination inthe same way as a destination search.(P.105)

4 Select “Add Destination Here” to insertthe new destination into the route.No. Function Page

Select to add destinations. 134

Select to delete destina-tions. 135

Select to reorder destina-tions. 135

Select to set route prefer-ences. 136

Select to change routetype. 136

Select to set detours. 137

Select to start from adja-cent road. 138

ADDING DESTINATIONS

Page 135: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

135

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P.133)

2 Select “Reorder”.

3 Select the desired destination and se-lect “Move Up” or “Move Down” tochange the arrival order. Then select“OK”.

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P.133)

2 Select “Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

When more than 1 destination has been set,a list will be displayed on the screen. Selectthe item(s) to be deleted.

“Delete All”: Select to delete all destina-tions on the list. If more than 1 destination has been set, the

system will recalculate the route(s) to theset destination(s) as necessary.

REORDERING DESTINATIONS

When more than 1 destination has beenset, the arrival order of the destinationscan be changed.

DELETING DESTINATIONS

Page 136: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

136

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P.133)

2 Select “Preferences”.

3 Select the desired route preferencesand select “OK”.

When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P.133)

2 Select “Route Type”.

3 Select the desired route type and select“OK”.

During driving, the route guidance startsafter selecting the desired route type.

4 The entire route from the starting pointto the destination is displayed.

For details about this screen: P.121

SETTING ROUTE PREFERENCES

The conditions to determine the routecan be selected from various choicessuch as freeways, toll roads, ferries, etc.

SELECTING ROUTE TYPE

Page 137: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

137

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P.133)

2 Select “Detour”.

3 Select the desired detour distance.

DETOUR SETTING

During the route guidance, the routecan be changed to detour around a sec-tion of the route where a delay is causedby road repairs, an accident, etc.

No. Function

Select to detour the route for thenext 1 mile.

Select to detour the route for thenext 3 miles.

Select to detour the route for thenext 5 miles.

Select to detour the entire route.

Select to make the system search forthe route based on traffic congestioninformation received from traffic in-formation. (P.100)

INFORMATION

● This picture shows an example of how thesystem would guide around a delaycaused by a traffic jam.

This position indicates the location of atraffic jam caused by road repairs, an ac-cident, etc.

This route indicates the detour suggest-ed by the system.

● When the vehicle is on a freeway, thedetour distance selections are 5, 15 and25 miles (or 5, 15 and 25 km if units arein km).

● The system may not be able to calculate adetour route depending on the selecteddistance and surrounding road condi-tions.

Page 138: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

138

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P.133)

2 Select “Start from Adjacent Road”.

STARTING FROM ADJACENT ROAD

When a freeway and a surface road runin parallel, the system may show theguidance route going on the freewaywhile driving on the surface road, or viceversa. If this happens, you can instantly choosethe adjacent road for the route guid-ance.

INFORMATION

● When there is no adjacent road, thisscreen button will not be displayed.

Page 139: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

139

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

4. MEMORY POINTS

1. MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Navigation”.

4 Select the desired item to be set.Home, preset destinations, addressbook entries, areas to avoid can be setas memory points. The registered pointscan be used as the destinations.(P.105)Registered areas to avoid, will be avoid-ed when the system searches for a route.

No. Function Page

Select to set home. 140

Select to set preset destina-tions. 142

Select to set the addressbook. 144

Select to set areas to avoid. 147

Select to delete previousdestinations. 150

Select to set detailed navi-gation settings. 151

Page 140: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

140

4. MEMORY POINTS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”screen. (P.139)

2 Select “Home”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

1 Select “Set Home Location”.

2 Select the desired item to search for thelocation. (P.105)

3 Select “OK” when the editing homescreen appears.

SETTING UP HOME

If home has been registered, that infor-mation can be recalled by selecting “GoHome” on the “Destination” screen.(P.109)

No. Function Page

Select to register home. 140

Select to edit home. 141

Select to delete home. 141

REGISTERING HOME

Page 141: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

141

4. MEMORY POINTS

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Edit”.

2 Select the desired item to be edited.

3 Select “OK”.

1 Select “Delete”.

2 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

EDITING HOME

No. Function Page

Select to edit the homename. 146

Select to set display of thehome name on/off.

Select to edit location infor-mation. 146

Select to edit the phonenumber. 146

Select to change the icon tobe displayed on the mapscreen.

145

DELETING HOME

Page 142: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

142

4. MEMORY POINTS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”screen. (P.139)

2 Select “Preset Destinations”.

3 Select the desired item.

1 Select “Set”.

2 Select the desired item to search for thelocation. (P.105)

3 Select a position for this preset destina-tion.

4 Select “OK” when the editing presetdestination screen appears. (P.143)

SETTING UP PRESET DESTINATIONS

If a preset destination has been regis-tered, that information can be recalledby using preset destinations on the“Destination” screen. (P.109)

No. Function Page

Select to register a presetdestination. 142

Select to edit a preset desti-nation. 143

Select to delete a presetdestination. 143

REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS

INFORMATION

● Up to 5 preset destinations can be regis-tered.

Page 143: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

143

4. MEMORY POINTS

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Edit”.

2 Select the desired preset destination.

3 Select the item to be edited.

4 Select “OK”.

1 Select “Delete”.

2 Select the preset destination to be de-leted and select “Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

EDITING PRESET DESTINATIONS

No. Function Page

Select to edit the presetdestination name. 146

Select to set display of thepreset destination nameon/off.

Select to edit location infor-mation. 146

Select to edit the phonenumber. 146

Select to change the icon tobe displayed on the mapscreen.

145

DELETING PRESET DESTINATIONS

Page 144: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

144

4. MEMORY POINTS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”screen. (P.139)

2 Select “Address Book”.

3 Select the desired item.

1 Select “New”.

2 Select the desired item to search for thelocation. (P.105)

3 Select “OK” when the editing addressbook entry screen appears. (P.145)

SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK

Points on the map can be registered.

No. Function Page

Select to register addressbook entries. 144

Select to edit address bookentries. 145

Select to delete addressbook entries. 147

REGISTERING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES

INFORMATION

● Up to 100 address book entries can beregistered.

Page 145: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

145

4. MEMORY POINTS

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Edit”.

2 Select the desired address book entry.

3 Select the item to be edited.

4 Select “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE ICON

1 Select “Edit” next to the “Icon”.

2 Select the desired icon.

Change pages by selecting the “Page 1”,“Page 2” or “With Sound” tab.

“With Sound”: Select the memory pointswith a sound

EDITING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES

The icon, name, location and/or phonenumber of a registered address bookentry can be edited.

No. Function Page

Select to edit the addressbook entry name. 146

Select to set display of theaddress book entry nameon/off.

Select to edit location infor-mation. 146

Select to edit the phonenumber. 146

Select to change the icon tobe displayed on the mapscreen.

145

Page 146: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

146

4. MEMORY POINTS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

When the “With Sound” tab is selected

1 Select the “With Sound” tab.

2 Select the desired sound icon.

: Select to play the sound.When “Bell (with Direction)” is selected,

select an arrow to adjust the direction andselect “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE NAME

1 Select “Edit” next to “Name”.

2 Enter a name and select “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE LOCATION

1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”.

2 Scroll the map to the desired point(P.92) and select “OK”.

■ CHANGING PHONE NUMBER

1 Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”.

2 Enter the phone number and select“OK”.

A sound for some address book entriescan be set. When the vehicle approach-es the location of the address book en-try, the selected sound will be heard.

INFORMATION

● The bell sounds only when the vehicleapproaches this point in the direction thathas been set.

Page 147: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

147

4. MEMORY POINTS

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Delete”.

2 Select the item to be deleted and select“Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”screen. (P.139)

2 Select “Areas to Avoid”.

3 Select the desired item.

DELETING ADDRESS BOOK ENTRIES

SETTING UP AREAS TO AVOID

Areas to be avoided because of trafficjams, construction work or other rea-sons can be registered as “Areas toAvoid”.

No. Function Page

Select to register areas toavoid. 148

Select to edit areas toavoid. 148

Select to delete areas toavoid. 150

Page 148: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

148

4. MEMORY POINTS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “New”.

2 Select the desired item to search for thelocation. (P.105)

3 Select either or tochange the size of the area to be avoid-ed and select “OK”.

4 Select “OK” when the editing area toavoid screen appears.

1 Select “Edit”.

2 Select the area and select “OK”.

REGISTERING AREAS TO AVOID

INFORMATION

● If a destination is entered in the area toavoid or the route calculation cannot bemade without running through the area toavoid, a route passing through the area tobe avoided may be shown.

● Up to 10 locations can be registered aspoints/areas to avoid.

EDITING AREAS TO AVOID

The name, location and/or area size of aregistered area can be edited.

Page 149: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

149

4. MEMORY POINTS

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3 Select the item to be edited.

4 Select “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE NAME

1 Select “Edit” next to “Name”.

2 Enter a name and select “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE LOCATION

1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”.

2 Scroll the map to the desired point(P.92) and select “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE AREA SIZE

1 Select “Edit” next to “Size”.

2 Select either or tochange the size of the area to be avoid-ed and select “OK”.

No. Function Page

Select to edit the name ofthe area to avoid. 149

Select to set display of thearea to avoid name on/off.

Select to edit area location. 149

Select to edit area size. 149

Select to set the area toavoid function on/off.

Page 150: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

150

4. MEMORY POINTS

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Delete”.

2 Select the area to be deleted and select“Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”screen. (P.139)

2 Select “Delete Previous Dest.”.

3 Select the previous destination to be de-leted and select “Delete”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

DELETING AREAS TO AVOID DELETING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS

Previous destinations can be deleted.

Page 151: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

151

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

5. SETUP

1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Navigation”.

4 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings”.

5 Select the items to be set.

Settings are available for pop-up infor-mation, favorite POI categories, low fuelwarning, etc.

Page 152: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

152

5. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION SETTINGS

No. Function Page

Select to set display of pop-up information on/off.

Select to set favorite POIcategories that are used forPOI selection to display onthe map screen.

153

Select to set display of lowfuel warning on/off. 153

Select to set IPD road guid-ance on/off.

Select to set the voice guid-ance for the next streetname on/off.

Select to set display of the3D city model map on/off.

Select to change the view-ing angle of the 3D map. 154

Select to adjust the currentposition mark manually orto adjust miscalculation ofthe distance caused by tirereplacement.

155

Select to reset all setupitems.

Page 153: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

153

5. SETUP

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”screen. (P.151)

2 Select “Favorite POI Categories”.

3 Select the category to be changed.

“Default”: Select to set the default catego-ries.

4 Select the desired POI category.

“List All Categories”: Select to display allPOI categories.

5 Select the desired POI icon.

1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”screen. (P.151)

2 Select “Low Fuel Warning”.

3 Select “On” or “Off”.

FAVORITE POI CATEGORIES (SELECT POI ICONS)

Up to 6 POI icons, which are used forselecting POIs on the map screen, canbe selected as favorites.

LOW FUEL WARNING

When the fuel level is low, a warningmessage will pop up on the screen.

Page 154: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

154

5. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ SEARCHING GAS STATION INLOW FUEL WARNING

1 Select “Yes” when the low fuel warningappears.

2 Select the desired nearby gas station.

3 Select “Enter ” to set as a destination.

“Info”: Select to display gas station informa-tion. (P.97)

1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”screen. (P.151)

2 Select “3D Map Viewing Angle”.

3 Select “Up” or “Down” to change theviewing angle.

“Default”: Select to set the initial angle.

A nearby gas station can be selected asa destination.

CHANGING VIEWING ANGLE OF 3D MAP

Page 155: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

155

5. SETUP

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”screen. (P.151)

2 Select “Calibration”.

3 Select the desired item.

■ POSITION/DIRECTION CALI-BRATION

1 Select “Position / Direction”.

2 Scroll the map to the desired point(P.92) and select “OK”.

3 Select an arrow to adjust the direction ofthe current position mark and select“OK”.

CURRENT POSITION/TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION

The current position mark can be adjust-ed manually. Miscalculation of the dis-tance caused by tire replacement canalso be adjusted.

For additional information on the accu-racy of a current position: P.160

When driving, the current position markwill be automatically corrected by GPSsignals. If GPS reception is poor due tolocation, the current position mark canbe adjusted manually.

Page 156: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

156

5. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION

1 Select “Tire Change”.The message appears and the quick dis-

tance calibration starts automatically.

The tire change calibration function willbe used when replacing the tires. Thisfunction will adjust miscalculationcaused by the circumference differencebetween the old and new tires.

INFORMATION

● If this procedure is not performed whenthe tires are replaced, the current posi-tion mark may be incorrectly displayed.

Page 157: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

157

5. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

2. TRAFFIC SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Traffic”.

4 Select the items to be set.

Traffic information such as traffic con-gestion or traffic incident warnings canbe made available.

Page 158: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

158

5. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

SCREEN FOR TRAFFIC SETTINGS

No. Function

Select to set the avoid traffic functionauto/manual. (P.159)

Select to set the usage of traffic infor-mation for the estimated arrival timeon/off.

Select to set the display of an arrowof free flowing traffic on/off.

Select to set to on/off whether toconsider the predictive traffic infor-mation (P.102) with estimated ar-rival time and detoured route search.

Select to set traffic incident voicewarning on/off.

Select to reset all setup items.

Page 159: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

159

5. SETUP

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Traffic Settings” screen.(P.157)

2 Select “Avoid Traffic”.

3 Select the desired item.

■ CHANGING THE ROUTE MANU-ALLY

1 Select the desired item.

AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC

No. Function

Select to automatically changeroutes when congestion informationof the guidance route has been re-ceived.

Select to select manually whether ornot to change routes when conges-tion information of the guidanceroute has been received. In thismode, a screen will appear to ask ifyou wish to reroute.

Select to not reroute when conges-tion information for the guidanceroute has been received.

When the navigation system calculatesa new route, the following screen will bedisplayed.

No. Function

Select to start route guidance usingthe new route.

Select to confirm the new route andcurrent route on the map.

Select to continue the current routeguidance.

Page 160: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

160

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

The Global Positioning System (GPS) de-veloped and operated by the U.S. Depart-ment of Defense provides an accuratecurrent position, normally using 4 or moresatellites, and in some case 3 satellites. TheGPS system has a certain level of inaccura-cy. While the navigation system compen-sates for this most of the time, occasionalpositioning errors of up to 300 ft. (100 m)can and should be expected. Generally, po-sition errors will be corrected within a fewseconds.

When the vehicle is receiving signals fromsatellites, the “GPS” mark appears at thetop left of the screen.The GPS signal may be physically obstruct-ed, leading to inaccurate vehicle position onthe map screen. Tunnels, tall buildings,trucks, or even the placement of objects onthe instrument panel may obstruct the GPSsignals.The GPS satellites may not send signals dueto repairs or improvements being made tothem.Even when the navigation system is receiv-ing clear GPS signals, the vehicle positionmay not be shown accurately or inappropri-ate route guidance may occur in some cas-es.

LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

This navigation system calculates thecurrent position using satellite signals,various vehicle signals, map data, etc.However, an accurate position may notbe shown depending on satellite condi-tions, road configuration, vehicle condi-tion or other circumstances.

NOTICE

● The installation of window tinting mayobstruct the GPS signals. Most windowtinting contains some metallic contentthat will interfere with GPS signal recep-tion of the antenna in the instrumentpanel. We advise against the use of win-dow tinting on vehicles equipped withnavigation systems.

Page 161: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

161

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Accurate current position may not beshown in the following cases:• When driving on a small angled Y-shaped

road.• When driving on a winding road.• When driving on a slippery road such as

in sand, gravel, snow, etc.• When driving on a long straight road.• When freeway and surface streets run in

parallel.• After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier.• When a long route is searched during

high speed driving.• When driving without setting the current

position calibration correctly.• After repeating a change of direction by

going forward and backward, or turningon a turntable in a parking lot.

• When leaving a covered parking lot orparking garage.

• When a roof carrier is installed.• When driving with tire chains installed.• When the tires are worn.• After replacing a tire or tires.• When using tires that are smaller or

larger than the factory specifications.• When the tire pressure in any of the 4

tires is not correct.

Inappropriate route guidance may occur inthe following cases:• When turning at an intersection off the

designated route guidance.• If you set more than 1 destination but skip

any of them, auto reroute will display aroute returning to the destination on theprevious route.

• When turning at an intersection for whichthere is no route guidance.

• When passing through an intersection forwhich there is no route guidance.

• During auto reroute, the route guidancemay not be available for the next turn tothe right or left.

• During high speed driving, it may take along time for auto reroute to operate. Inauto reroute, a detour route may beshown.

• After auto reroute, the route may not bechanged.

• If an unnecessary U-turn is shown orannounced.

• If a location has multiple names and thesystem announces 1 or more of them.

• When a route cannot be searched.• If the route to your destination includes

gravel, unpaved roads or alleys, the routeguidance may not be shown.

• Your destination point might be shown onthe opposite side of the street.

• When a portion of the route has regula-tions prohibiting the entry of the vehiclethat vary by time, season or other reasons.

• The road and map data stored in the navi-gation system may not be complete ormay not be the latest version.

If the vehicle cannot receive GPS signals,the current position can be adjustedmanually. For information on setting thecurrent position calibration: P.155

After replacing a tire: P.156

Page 162: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

162

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

INFORMATION

● This navigation system uses tire turningdata and is designed to work with factory-specified tires for the vehicle. Installingtires that are larger or smaller than theoriginally equipped diameter may causeinaccurate display of the current position.The tire pressure also affects the diame-ter of the tires, so make sure that the tirepressure of all 4 tires is correct.

Page 163: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

163

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

2. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERED AREA

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Nav”.

3 Select “Options”.

4 Select “Map Data”.

5 Check that the map data screen is dis-played.

MAP INFORMATION

Coverage areas and legal informationcan be displayed and map data can beupdated.

No. Function

Map version

Select to update map.

Select to display map coverage ar-eas.

Select to display legal information.

INFORMATION

● Map data updates are available for a fee.Contact your Lexus dealer for furtherinformation.

Page 164: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

164

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

ABOUT THE MAP DATA

Map data for the navigation system iscontained in a SD card that is inserted inthe SD card slot located at the bottom ofthe audio control panel. Do not eject the SD card, as doing somay deactivate the navigation system.

NOTICE

● Do not edit or delete the map data on theSD card, as doing so may deactivate thenavigation system.

INFORMATION

●microSDHC Logo is a trademark ofSD-3C, LLC.

Page 165: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

165

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

3

NA

VIG

ATIO

N SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Page 166: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

166

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:44

1. QUICK REFERENCE ............................. 168

2. SOME BASICS.......................................... 170TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF ... 170

SELECTING AN AUDIO SOURCE ............... 171

DISC SLOT ................................................................. 172

USB/AUX PORT ..................................................... 173

SOUND SETTINGS ............................................... 174

AUDIO SCREEN ADJUSTMENT .................. 176

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM........................ 178

1. AM/FM RADIO ........................................ 179

OVERVIEW................................................................ 179

PRESETTING A STATION ................................. 183

SELECTING A STATION FROM THE LIST ................................................................... 183

CACHING A RADIO PROGRAM ............... 185

RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM ...... 186

TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT (FM RADIO) .......................................................... 188

USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY......... 188

AVAILABLE HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY.................................................. 189

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ....................... 191

2. XM Satellite Radio .................................... 192

OVERVIEW................................................................ 192

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM Satellite Radio.......................................................... 195

DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID .......................... 197

PRESETTING A CHANNEL.............................. 197

SELECTING A CHANNEL FROM THE LIST ................................................................... 198

IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS .............................................. 199

3. INTERNET RADIO................................. 200

LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO............ 200

1 BASIC OPERATION 2 RADIO OPERATION

4

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Page 167: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

4

167

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:44

1. CD.................................................................. 201

OVERVIEW................................................................ 201

PLAYING AN AUDIO CD .............................. 205

PLAYING AN MP3/WMA/AAC DISC ... 206

2. DVD.............................................................. 207

OVERVIEW............................................................... 207

DVD OPTIONS.......................................................... 211

3. USB MEMORY......................................... 214

OVERVIEW................................................................ 214

USB AUDIO ............................................................... 218

4. iPod ................................................................ 219

OVERVIEW................................................................ 219

iPod AUDIO .............................................................. 224

iPod VIDEO ............................................................... 225

5. Bluetooth® AUDIO ................................ 226

OVERVIEW............................................................... 226

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE ... 230

LISTENING TO Bluetooth® AUDIO ........... 230

6. AUX ............................................................. 232

OVERVIEW............................................................... 232

7. VTR ............................................................... 235

OVERVIEW.............................................................. 235

VTR OPTIONS......................................................... 237

1. STEERING SWITCHES ........................ 238

1. AUDIO SETTINGS................................. 240

AUDIO SETTINGS SCREEN ............................ 241

1. OPERATING INFORMATION......... 249

RADIO......................................................................... 249

DVD PLAYER AND DISC .................................. 251

iPod................................................................................ 256

FILE INFORMATION........................................... 257

TERMS ......................................................................... 259

ERROR MESSAGES.............................................. 261

3 MEDIA OPERATION 4 AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

5 SETUP

6 TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Page 168: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

168

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1. BASIC OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE

■ CONTROL SCREEN

Operations such as selecting a preset station and adjusting the sound balance are car-ried out on the screen. Using the instrument panelPress the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button to display the audio/visual screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Radio” or “Media” todisplay the audio/visual screen.

Page 169: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

169

1. BASIC OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ CONTROL PANEL

Function Page

Using the radio 179

Playing an audio CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc 201

Playing a DVD 207

Playing a USB memory 214

Playing an iPod® 219

Playing a Bluetooth® device 226

Using the AUX port 232

Playing the VTR 235

Using the steering wheel audio switches 238

Audio system settings 240

INFORMATION

● The display and button positions will differ depending on the type of the system.

Page 170: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

170

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

2. SOME BASICS

“PWR·VOL” knob: Press to turn the audio/visual system on and off. The system turnson in the last mode used. Turn this knob toadjust the volume.“RADIO”, “MEDIA” button: Press to dis-play screen buttons for the audio/visual sys-tem.

This section describes some of the basicfeatures of the audio/visual system.Some information may not pertain toyour system.Your audio/visual system works whenthe power switch is turned to ACCES-SORY or ON mode.

NOTICE

●To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the audio/visualsystem on longer than necessary whenthe hybrid system is not operating.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

A function that enables automatic returnto the previous screen from the audio/visual screen can be selected. (P.64)

Page 171: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

171

1. BASIC OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Using the instrument panel

1 Each time the “RADIO” or “MEDIA”button is pressed, the audio controlmode changes.

“RADIO” button: To display the radio oper-ation screen.“MEDIA” button: To display the externalmedia operation screen.

Using the Remote Touch

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Radio” or “Media”.

3 Select “Source”.

4 Select the desired source.

SELECTING AN AUDIO SOURCE

INFORMATION

● Dimmed screen buttons cannot be oper-ated.

● When there are two pages, select “ ” or“ ” to change the page.

Page 172: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

172

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Source”.

2 Select “Reorder”.

3 Select the desired audio source then“<<” or “>>” to reorder.

1 Insert a disc into the disc slot.

After insertion, the disc is automaticallyloaded.

REORDERING THE AUDIO SOURCE

DISC SLOT

INSERTING A DISC

Page 173: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

173

1. BASIC OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Press the “ ” button and remove thedisc.

1 Press the lid.

2 Open the cover and connect a device.

Turn on the power of the device if it is notturned on.

EJECTING A DISC

NOTICE

●Never try to disassemble or oil any part ofthe DVD player. Do not insert anythingother than a disc into the slot.

INFORMATION

● The player is intended for use with 4.7 in.(12 cm) discs only.

● When inserting a disc, gently insert thedisc with the label facing up.

USB/AUX PORT

There are 2 USB ports and an AUX portin the console box.

Page 174: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

174

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select .

INFORMATION

● Up to two portable players can be con-nected to the USB port at the same time.

SOUND SETTINGS

DSP CONTROL

Page 175: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

175

1. BASIC OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

2 Select the “DSP” tab.

3 Select the desired items to be set.

No. Function

The system adjusts to the optimumvolume and tone quality according tovehicle speed to compensate for in-creased vehicle noise.

This function can create a feeling ofpresence.

TONE AND BALANCE

TONE:How good an audio program sounds islargely determined by the mix of the tre-ble, mid and bass levels. In fact, differentkinds of music and vocal programs usu-ally sound better with different mixes oftreble, mid and bass.BALANCE:A good balance of the left and right ste-reo channels and of the front and rearsound levels is also important.Keep in mind that when listening to a ste-reo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase thevolume of 1 group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

Page 176: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

176

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select .

2 Select the “Sound” tab.

3 Select the desired screen button.

DVD video/iPod video/VTR

1 Select “Options” on the control screen.

2 Select “Wide” on the options screen.

3 Select the desired item to be adjusted.

No. Function

Select “+” or “-” to adjust high-pitched tones.

Select “+” or “-” to adjust mid-pitchedtones.

Select “+” or “-” to adjust low-pitchedtones.

Select to adjust the sound balancebetween the front and rear speakers.

Select to adjust the sound balancebetween the left and right speakers.

AUDIO SCREEN ADJUSTMENT

SCREEN SIZE SETTINGS

The screen size can be selected for eachtype of media.

No. Function

Select to display a 4 : 3 screen, witheither side in black.

Select to enlarge the image horizon-tally and vertically to full screen.

Select to enlarge the image by thesame ratio horizontally and vertically.

Page 177: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

177

1. BASIC OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

DVD video/iPod video/VTR

1 Select “Options” on the control screen.

2 Select “Display” on the option screen.

3 Select the desired item to be adjusted.CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, COLOR AND TONE ADJUSTMENT

The brightness, contrast, color and toneof the screen can be adjusted.

Screen button Function

“Color” “R” Select to strengthen thered color of the screen.

“Color” “G”Select to strengthen thegreen color of thescreen.

“Tone” “+” Select to strengthen thetone of the screen.

“Tone” “-” Select to weaken thetone of the screen.

“Contrast” “+” Select to strengthen thecontrast of the screen.

“Contrast” “-” Select to weaken thecontrast of the screen.

“Brightness” “+” Select to brighten thescreen.

“Brightness” “-” Select to darken thescreen.

INFORMATION

● Depending on the audio source, somefunctions may not be available.

Page 178: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

178

1. BASIC OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Press this switch to operate the voicecommand system.

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

The voice command system and its list ofcommands can be operated. (P.264)

Page 179: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

179

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

2. RADIO OPERATION

1. AM/FM RADIO

■ CONTROL SCREEN

OVERVIEW

The radio operation screen can be reached by the following methods:Using the instrument panelPress the “RADIO” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Radio” to display the au-dio control screen.

Top screen

Option screen

Page 180: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

180

2. RADIO OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ CONTROL PANEL

Page 181: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

181

2. RADIO OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

No. Function

Select to display the audio source selection screen.

Select to display HD) multicast channels available.

Select to display the cache radio operation buttons.

Select to display the audio setting screen.

Select to display the sound setting screen.

Select to display the option screen.

Select to store artist and song title information.

Select to turn HD Radio mode on/off. When the “HD Radio” indicator is off, the station list shows only analog broadcasts.

Select to scan for receivable stations.

Select to tune to preset stations/channels.

Select to change the page of preset buttons.

Select to display text messages.

Select to display a list of receivable stations.

Select to seek a receivable station of the selected category.

Select to select a program type/channel category.

FM only: Select to display traffic messages.

Analog FM only: Select to display RBDS text messages.

Turn to step up/down frequencies. Turn to move up/down the list.

Press to select a preset station. Press and hold to seek for a station.

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio system.

Press to select a radio mode. While in a radio mode, pressing the “RADIO” button changes radio modes.

Page 182: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

182

2. RADIO OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Cache radio only: Press to turn mute on/off.

INFORMATION

● The radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received.

No. Function

Page 183: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

183

2. RADIO OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Tune in the desired station.

2 Select “add new”.

To change the preset station to a differentone, select and hold the preset station.

3 Select “Yes” on the confirmation screen.

4 Select “OK” after setting the new presetstation.

1 Select “Options”.

2 Select “Station List”.

PRESETTING A STATION

Radio mode has a mix preset function,which can store up to 36 stations (6 sta-tions per page x 6 pages) from any of theAM, FM or SAT bands.

INFORMATION

● The number of preset radio stations dis-played on the screen can be changed.(P.242)

SELECTING A STATION FROM THE LIST

A station list can be displayed.

Page 184: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

184

2. RADIO OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3 FM radio only: Select the desired pro-gram type.

4 Select the desired station and select“OK”.

■ REFRESHING THE STATION LIST

1 Select “Refresh” on the “Station List”screen and the following screen will bedisplayed.

“Cancel Refresh”: Select to cancel the re-fresh.“Source”: Select to change to another au-dio source while refreshing.

INFORMATION

● The audio system sound is muted duringrefresh operation.

● In some situations, it may take some timeto update the station list.

Page 185: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

185

2. RADIO OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select on the right side of the screen.

2 Select the desired cache radio opera-tion button.

CACHING A RADIO PROGRAM

A radio program can be cached andplayed back in a time-shifted manner.

PLAYING BACK THE CACHE MANUALLY

The broadcast cached in the programcache can be played back manually.

No. Function

Hides the cache operation buttons

Select: Skips backward 2 minutesSelect and hold: Fast rewinds contin-uously

Returns to the live radio broadcast

Pauses the playback (To restart, se-

lect )

Select: Skips forward 2 minutesSelect and hold: Fast forwards con-tinuously

Red vertical bar: Shows what portionof the cached broadcast is currentlyplayingLight blue bar: Shows time in whichcache writing is in progress

Page 186: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

186

2. RADIO OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

AUTOMATIC PLAYBACK OF THE CACHE

If the radio broadcast is interrupted byanother audio output, such as anincoming phone call, the system willautomatically cache the interruptedportion and perform time-shift playbackwhen the interruption ends. To manuallyoperate the cache operation: (P.185)

INFORMATION

● The system can store up to 15 minutes.Cached data will be erased when theradio mode or station is changed or whenthe audio system is turned off.

● If noise or silence occurs during the cach-ing process, cache writing will continue,with the noise or silence recorded as is. Inthis case, the cached broadcast will con-tain the noise or silence when playedback.

RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM

This audio system is equipped with Ra-dio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS).RBDS mode allows text messages to bereceived from radio stations that utilizeRBDS transmitters.When RBDS is on, the radio can— only select stations of a particular pro-gram type,— display messages from radio stations,— search for a stronger signal station.RBDS features are available only whenlistening to an FM station thatbroadcasts RBDS information and the“FM Info” indicator is on.

Page 187: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

187

2. RADIO OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Options”.

2 Select “TYPE ” or “ TYPE” to moveforward and backward through the pro-gram list.

Once a program type has been set, “TYPESEEK” will appear on the screen.The program list is in the following order:

• “Classical”• “Country”• “EasyLis” (Easy Listening)• “Inform” (Information)• “Jazz”• “News”• “Oldies”• “Other”• “Pop Music”• “Religion”• “Rock”• “R&B” (Rhythm and Blues)• “Sports”• “Talk”• “Traffic” (Not available when “HD Radio”

indicator is off.)• “Alert” (Emergency Alert)

3 Select “TYPE SEEK” and the systemwill start to seek for stations in the rele-vant program type.

SELECTING A DESIRED PROGRAM TYPE

INFORMATION

● If no relevant program can be found, “notype” will appear on the screen.

Page 188: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

188

2. RADIO OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Options”.

2 Select “Traffic” to seek a traffic programstation. “TRAF SEEK” will appear on thescreen.

TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT (FM RADIO)

A station that regularly broadcasts traf-fic information is automatically located.

INFORMATION

● If no traffic program station is found, “NoTraffic” will appear on the screen.

● If a traffic program station is found, thename of the traffic program station will bedisplayed for a while.

USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY

HD Radio™ Technology is the digitalevolution of analog AM/FM radio. Yourradio product has a special receiverwhich allows it to receive digital broad-casts (where available) in addition to theanalog broadcasts it already receives.Digital broadcasts have better soundquality than analog broadcasts as digitalbroadcasts provide free, crystal clearaudio with no static or distortion. Formore information, and a guide to avail-able radio stations and programming,refer to www.hdradio.com.HD Radio features included in Lexusradios:Digital Sound HD Radio broadcasts

deliver crystal-clear, digital audio qualityto listeners.HD2/HD3 Channels FM stations can

provide additional digital only audio pro-gramming with expanded content andformat choices on HD2/HD3 channels.PSD Program Service Data (PSD)

gives you on-screen information such asartist name and song title. iTunes Tagging Listeners can tag

(store) songs they like for later review andpurchase through iTunes.Artist Experience Images related to

the broadcast are displayed on the radioscreen, such as album cover art and sta-tion logos.

Page 189: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

189

2. RADIO OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select the “HD)” logo.

2 Select the desired channel.

Turning the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob canalso select the desired multicast channel.

1 Select “Tag” to bookmark the music in-formation.

2 Connect an iPod. (P.173)Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not

turned on.Once an iPod is connected, the music tag

moves from the radio into the iPod.When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the

“tagged” information of the songs whichwere tagged while listening to the radio canbe viewed. Then a user may decide to pur-chase the song or CD/Album which hadbeen listened to on their radio.

HD Radio Technology manufacturedunder license from iBiquity DigitalCorporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarksof iBiquity Digital Corp.

AVAILABLE HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY

MULTICAST

On the FM radio frequency most digitalstations have “multiple” or supplementalprograms on one FM station.

PRESERVING A MUSIC INFORMATION

Tag information in the music broadcast-ing is preserved in the system and trans-mits to an iPod.

Page 190: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

190

2. RADIO OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

INFORMATION

● The tag information can not be preservedwhile scanning or caching the radio sta-tion.

● If tagging the music information fails,“Saving the HD Radio tag failed.” will bedisplayed on the screen. If this occurs, tagthe information again.

● HD Radio™ stations can be preset.● An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be

displayed on the screen when in digital.The “HD)” logo will first appear in a graycolor indicating the station is indeed (ananalog and) a digital station. Once thedigital signal is acquired, the logo willchange to a bright orange color.

● The song title, artist name and musicgenre will appear on the screen whenavailable by the radio station. In addition,radios stations may send album coverpictures when available.

● As a user works through the analog radiostations, (where applicable) the radioreceiver will automatically tune from ananalog signal to a digital signal within 5seconds.

Page 191: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

191

2. RADIO OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Experience Cause Action

Mismatch of time align-ment- a user may hear ashort period of program-ming replayed or an echo,stutter or skip.

The radio stations analogand digital volume is notproperly aligned or the sta-tion is in ballgame mode.

None, radio broadcast issue. Auser can contact the radio station.

Sound fades, blending inand out.

Radio is shifting betweenanalog and digital audio.

Reception issue, may clear-up asthe vehicle continues to be driven.Turning the indicator of the “HDRadio” button off can force radio inan analog audio.

Audio mute conditionwhen an HD2/HD3 multi-cast channel had been play-ing.

The radio does not have ac-cess to digital signals at themoment.

This is normal behavior, wait untilthe digital signal returns. If out ofthe coverage area, seek a new sta-tion.

Audio mute delay when se-lecting an HD2/HD3 mul-ticast channel preset.

The digital multicast con-tent is not available until HDRadio™ broadcast can bedecoded and make the au-dio available. This takes upto 7 seconds.

This is normal behavior, wait for theaudio to become available.

Text information does notmatch the present song au-dio.

Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified.Complete the form; www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences.

No text information shownfor the present selected fre-quency.

Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified.Complete the form; www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences.

Page 192: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

192

2. RADIO OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

2. XM Satellite Radio

■ CONTROL SCREEN

OVERVIEW

The radio operation screen can be reached by the following methods:Using the instrument panelPress the “RADIO” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Radio” to display the au-dio control screen.

Page 193: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

193

2. RADIO OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ CONTROL PANEL

Page 194: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

194

2. RADIO OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

No. Function

Select to display the audio source selection screen.

Select to display a receivable channel list.

Select to display the sound setting screen.

Select to display text messages.

Select to select a program type/channel category.

Select to scan for receivable channels.

Select to tune to preset stations/channels.

Select to change the page of preset buttons.

Turn to step up/down channels. Turn to move up/down the list.

Press to select a preset channel. Press and hold to seek for a channel.

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio system.

Press to select a radio mode. While in a radio mode, pressing the “RADIO” button changes radio modes.

Page 195: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

195

2. RADIO OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM Satellite Radio

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast inthe vehicle, a subscription to the XMSatellite Radio service is necessary.An XM Satellite Radio is a tuner de-signed exclusively to receive broadcastsprovided under a separate subscription.Availability is limited to the 48 contigu-ous U.S. states and some Canadianprovinces.

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE

It is necessary to enter into a separateservice agreement with XM SatelliteRadio in order to receive satellite broad-cast programming in the vehicle. Addi-tional activation and servicesubscription fees apply that are not in-cluded in the purchase price of the vehi-cle and digital satellite tuner.

For complete information on subscrip-tion rates and terms, or to subscribe toXM Satellite Radio:

U.S.A.Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987.

CanadaRefer to www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.

NOTICE

●XM Radio Services Legal Disclaimersand Warnings• Fees and Taxes Subscription fee,

taxes, one time activation fee, and otherfees may apply. Subscription fee isconsumer only. All fees andprogramming subject to change.Subscriptions subject to CustomerAgreement available atwww.siriusxm.com. (U.S.A.) orwww.xmradio.ca (Canada) XM serviceonly available in the 48 contiguousUnited States and Canada.Explicit Language Notice Channelswith frequent explicit language areindicated with an “XL” preceding thechannel name. Channel blocking isavailable for XM Satellite Radioreceivers by notifying XM at;U.S.A. Customers:Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling 1-877-515-3987Canadian Customers:Visit www.xmradio.ca or calling 1-877-438-9677

●It is prohibited to copy, decompile,disassemble, reverse engineer, hack,manipulate, or otherwise make availableany technology or software incorporatedin receivers compatible with the XMSatellite Radio System or that support theXM website, the Online Service or any ofits content. Furthermore, the AMBE®

voice compression software included inthis product is protected by intellectualproperty rights including patent rights,copyrights, and trade secrets of DigitalVoice Systems, Inc.

●Note: this applies to XM receivers onlyand not XM Ready devices.

Page 196: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

196

2. RADIO OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

INFORMATION

● XM Radio Services Descriptions• Radio and Entertainment

XM offers more than 170 satellite radiochannels of commercial-free music andpremier sports, news, talk, and enter-tainment. XM is broadcast via satellitesto millions of listeners across the conti-nental United States. XM subscriberslisten to XM on satellite radio receiversfor the car, home, and portable use.More information about XM is availableonline at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) orwww.xmradio.ca (Canada).

● XM Radio Services SubscriptionInstructions• For XM Services requiring a

subscription (such as XM Radio, andsome Infotainment & data services), thefollowing paragraph shall be included.Required XM Radio and someInfotainment & data services monthlysubscriptions sold separately after trialperiod. Subscription fee is consumeronly. All fees and programming subjectto change. Subscriptions are subject tothe Customer Agreement available atwww.siriusxm.com. XM service onlyavailable in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates. 2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc.Sirius, XM and all related marks andlogos are trademarks of Sirius XMRadio Inc. All other marks, channelnames and logos are the property oftheir respective owners.For more information, programschedules, and to subscribe or extendsubscription after complimentary trialperiod; more information is available at:USA Customers:Visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-866-635-2349

INFORMATION

● XM Satellite Radio is solely responsiblefor the quality, availability and content ofthe satellite radio services provided,which are subject to the terms and condi-tions of the XM Satellite Radio customerservice agreement.

● Customers should have their radio IDready; the radio ID can be found by tun-ing to “Ch 000” on the radio. For details,see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID”below.

● All fees and programming are theresponsibility of XM Satellite Radio andare subject to change.

SATELLITE TUNER TECHNOLOGY NOTICE

Lexus’s satellite radio tuners are award-ed Type Approval Certificates from XMSatellite Radio Inc. as proof of compati-bility with the services offered by XMSatellite Radio.

INFORMATION

●Satellite tunerThe tuner supports only Audio Services(Music and Talk) and the accompanyingText Information of XM® Satellite Radio.

Page 197: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

197

2. RADIO OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

If “Ch 000” is selected using the“TUNE·SCROLL” knob, the ID code,which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will bedisplayed. If another channel is selected,the ID code will no longer be displayed.The channel (000) alternates between dis-playing the radio ID and the specific radiocode.

1 Tune in the desired channel.

2 Select “add new”.

To change the preset channel to a differentone, select and hold the preset station/channel.

3 Select “Yes” on the confirmation screen.

4 Select “OK” after setting the new presetchannel.

DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID

Each XM tuner is identified with aunique radio ID. The radio ID is requiredwhen activating an XM service or whenreporting a problem.

PRESETTING A CHANNEL

Page 198: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

198

2. RADIO OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Channel List”.

2 Select the desired program type.

3 Select the desired channel and select“OK”.

SELECTING A CHANNEL FROM THE LIST

Page 199: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

199

2. RADIO OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS

When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Refer-ring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action.

Message Explanation

“Ck Antenna”

The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antennacable is attached securely.

A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna ca-ble. See a Lexus certified dealer for assistance.

“Ch Unauth”

You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The radio is beingupdated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM Satellite Radiofor subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you canchoose “Ch 000” and all free-to-air channels.

The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”.If it does not change automatically, select another channel. To listento the premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.

“No Signal” The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your ve-hicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

“Loading...” The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unithas received the information.

“Ch Off Air” The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Se-lect another channel.

----- There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated withthe channel at that time. No action is required.

“Ch Unavail”The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 sec-onds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”. If itdoes not change automatically, select another channel.

INFORMATION

● Contact the XM Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-438-9677(Canada).

Page 200: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

200

2. RADIO OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3. INTERNET RADIO

1 Select the desired application screenbutton.

The internet radio application screen is dis-played.Perform operations according to the dis-

played application screen.For the instrument panel operation method

and the Remote Touch operation method:P.171By pressing the “RADIO” button, the

“Audio” screen can be returned to.

LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO

One of LEXUS App Suite’s features isthe ability to listen to internet radio. In or-der to use this service, a compatiblephone and the navigation system needsto be set up. For details: P.362

INFORMATION

●Other applications can be activatedwhile listening to internet radio.

●An iPhone cannot be connected viaBluetooth® and USB connection at thesame time. However, it is possible torecharge an iPhone while using applica-tions by connecting via USB. The systemuses the connection method that wasused last. Therefore, if connected viaUSB after Bluetooth® connection, it isnecessary to reconnect the iPhone viaBluetooth®.

●Some parts of applications can beadjusted using the switches on the steer-ing wheel.

●For additional information, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987.

Page 201: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

201

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

3. MEDIA OPERATION

1. CD

■ CONTROL SCREEN

OVERVIEW

The CD operation screen can be reached by the following methods: Inserting a disc (P.172)

Using the instrument panelPress the “MEDIA” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Media” to display theaudio control screen.

Audio CD

MP3/WMA/AAC disc

Page 202: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

202

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ CONTROL PANEL

Page 203: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

203

3. MEDIA OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

No. Function

Select to display the audio source selection screen.

Select to select a track/file.

Displays cover art Select to display a track/file list.

Audio CD: Select to display a track list. MP3/WMA/AAC disc: Select to display a folder list. To return to the top screen, select

“Now Playing” on the list screen.

Select to display the sound setting screen.

Select to display the audio setting screen.

Select to set random playback.

Select to set repeat playback.

Shows progress

Select to play/pause.

Select to select a folder.

Press to select a media mode. While in a media mode, pressing the “MEDIA” button changes media modes.

Turn to select a track/file. Turn to move up/down the list.

Press to select a track/file. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio system.

Press to play/pause.

Press to eject a disc.

Disc slot

Page 204: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

204

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

INFORMATION

●If a disc contains CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the CD-DA files can beplayed back.

●If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to 32 char-acters can be displayed.

Page 205: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

205

3. MEDIA OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• track repeat off

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• random (1 disc random) off

PLAYING AN AUDIO CD

REPEATING

The track currently being listened to canbe repeated.

INFORMATION

● When is selected, “RPT” appearson the screen.

RANDOM ORDER

Tracks can be automatically and ran-domly selected.

INFORMATION

● When is selected, “RAND”appears on the screen.

Page 206: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

206

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:

When random playback is off• file repeat folder repeat off

When random playback is on• file repeatoff

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• random (1 folder random)

folder random (1 disc random) off

PLAYING AN MP3/WMA/AAC DISC

REPEATING

The file or folder currently being listenedto can be repeated.

INFORMATION

● Each time is selected, “RPT”/“FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.

RANDOM ORDER

Files or folders can be automatically andrandomly selected.

INFORMATION

● Each time is selected, “RAND”/“FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.

Page 207: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

207

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

2. DVD

For safety reasons, the DVD video discs can only be viewed when the following con-ditions are met:(a) The vehicle is completely stopped.(b) The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.(c) The parking brake is applied. While driving in DVD video mode, only the DVD’s audio can be heard.The playback condition of some DVD discs may be determined by the DVD softwareproducer. This DVD player plays a disc as the software producer intended. As such,some functions may not work properly. Be sure to read the instruction manual thatcomes with the individual DVD disc. (P.251)

OVERVIEW

The DVD operation screen can be reached by the following methods: Inserting a disc (P.172)

Using the instrument panelPress the “MEDIA” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Media” to display theaudio control screen.

Page 208: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

208

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ CONTROL SCREEN

■ CONTROL PANEL

Page 209: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

209

3. MEDIA OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

No. Function

Select to display the audio source selection screen.

Select to display the password input screen.

Select to display the menu screen.

Select to display the option screen. (P.211)

Select to display the sound setting screen.

Select to display the DVD setting screen.

Shows progress

During playback: Select to fast forward. During a pause: Select to slow forward.

Select to play/pause.

Select to stop the video screen.

Select to rewind.

Select to display the menu control key.

Select to display full screen video.

Press to select a media mode. While in a media mode, pressing the “MEDIA” button changes media modes.

Turn to select a chapter.

Press to select a chapter. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio system.

Press to play/pause.

Press to eject a disc.

Disc slot

Page 210: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

210

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

WARNING

● Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize theimpact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations representthe maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder soundeffects or when you change to a different audio source. The louder sounds may have a sig-nificant impact on the human body or pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind when youadjust the volume.

INFORMATION

●According to the DVD disc, some menu items can be selected directly. (For details, see themanual that comes with the DVD disc provided separately.)

● If appears on the screen when a control is selected, the operation relevant to the controlis not permitted.

Page 211: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

211

3. MEDIA OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Options”.

2 The following screen is displayed.

DVD OPTIONS No. Function Page

Select to display the titlesearch screen. 212

Select to display the prede-termined scene on thescreen and start playing.

Select to display the audioselection screen. 212

Select to display the subtitleselection screen. 212

Select to display the angleselection screen. 213

Select to change the screensize. 176

Select to display the imagequality adjustment screen. 177

Page 212: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

212

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Search”.

2 Enter the title number and select “OK”.

The player starts playing video for that titlenumber.

1 Select “Audio”.

2 Each time “Change” is selected, the au-dio language is changed.

The languages available are restricted tothose available on the DVD disc.

1 Select “Subtitle”.

2 Each time “Change” is selected, the lan-guage the subtitles are displayed in ischanged.

The languages available are restricted tothose available on the DVD disc.When “Hide” is selected, the subtitles can

be hidden.

SEARCHING BY TITLE

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

Page 213: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

213

3. MEDIA OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Angle”.

2 Each time “Change” is selected, the an-gle is changed.

The angles available are restricted to thoseavailable on the DVD disc.

CHANGING THE ANGLE

The angle can be selected for discs thatare multi-angle compatible when the an-gle mark appears on the screen.

Page 214: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

214

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3. USB MEMORY

■ CONTROL SCREEN

OVERVIEW

The USB memory operation screen can be reached by the following methods: Connecting a USB memory (P.173)

Using the instrument panelPress the “MEDIA” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Media” to display theaudio control screen.

Page 215: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

215

3. MEDIA OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ CONTROL PANEL

Page 216: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

216

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

No. Function

Select to select a folder/album.

Select to select a file/track.

Select to display the audio source selection screen.

Displays cover art Select to display a file/track list.

To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.

Select to display the play mode selection screen. To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.

Select to display the sound setting screen.

Select to display the audio settings screen.

Select to set random playback.

Select to set repeat playback.

Shows progress

Select to play/pause.

Press to select a media mode. While in a media mode, pressing the “MEDIA” button changes media modes.

Turn to select a track/file. Turn to move up/down the list.

Press to select a track/file. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio system.

Press to play/pause.

Page 217: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

217

3. MEDIA OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

WARNING

● Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the USB memory while driving.

NOTICE

● Depending on the size and shape of the USB memory that is connected to the system, thelid may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the lid as this may damage the USBmemory or the terminal, etc.

● Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehi-cle may damage the portable player.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is con-nected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its ter-minal.

INFORMATION

●If tag information exists, the file/folder names will be changed to track/album names.

Page 218: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

218

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:

When random playback is off• file/track repeat folder/album

repeat off

When random playback is on• file/track repeat off

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• random (1 folder/album random)

folder/album random (all folder/albumrandom) off

USB AUDIO

REPEATING

The file/track or folder/album currentlybeing listened to can be repeated.

INFORMATION

● Each time is selected, “RPT”/“FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.

RANDOM ORDER

Files/tracks or folders/albums can beautomatically and randomly selected.

INFORMATION

● Each time is selected, “RAND”/“FLD.RAND” appears on the screen.

Page 219: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

219

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

4. iPod

■ CONTROL SCREEN

OVERVIEW

The iPod operation screen can be reached by the following methods: Connecting an iPod (P.173)

Using the instrument panelPress the “MEDIA” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Media” to display theaudio control screen.

iPod audio

iPod video

Page 220: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

220

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ CONTROL PANEL

Page 221: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

221

3. MEDIA OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

No.Function

Audio Video

Select to display the audio source selectionscreen.

Select to display the audio source selectionscreen.

Select to select a track.

Displays cover art Select to display a track list.

To return to the top screen, select “NowPlaying” on the list screen.

Select to display the play mode selectionscreen.To return to the top screen, select “NowPlaying” on the list screen.

Select to display the play mode selectionscreen.To return to the top screen, select “NowPlaying” on the list screen.

Select to display the sound setting screen. Select to display the sound setting screen.

Select to display the audio settings screen.

Select to set random playback.

Select to set repeat playback.

Shows progress Shows progress

Select to play/pause. Select to play/pause.

Select to display the option screen.(P.225)

Select to fast forward.

Select to rewind.

Select to display full screen video.

Press to select a media mode. While in a media mode, pressing the

“MEDIA” button changes media modes.

Press to select a media mode. While in a media mode, pressing the

“MEDIA” button changes media modes.

Turn to select a track. Turn to move up/down the list.

Turn to select a file. Turn to move up/down the list.

Press to select a track. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Press to select a file. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Page 222: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

222

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio sys-

tem.

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio sys-

tem.

Press to play/pause. Press to play/pause.

No.Function

Audio Video

Page 223: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

223

3. MEDIA OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

WARNING

● Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the iPod while driving.

NOTICE

● Depending on the size and shape of the iPod that is connected to the system, the lid may notclose fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the lid as this may damage the iPod or the termi-nal, etc.

● Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehi-cle may damage the portable player.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is con-nected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its ter-minal.

INFORMATION

●The system can only output the sound while driving.●When an iPod is connected using a genuine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging its battery.●Depending on the iPod, the video sound may not be able to be heard.●Depending on the iPod and the songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed. This

function can be changed to “On” or “Off”. (P.243) It may take time to display iPod coverart, and the iPod may not be operated while the cover art display is in process.

●When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod willresume playing from the same point it was last used.

●Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be avail-able.

●For viewing videos from an iPod, it is necessary to set “Video Sound Input” to “A/V”.(P.241)

●If an iPhone is connected via Bluetooth® and USB at the same time, system operation maybecome unstable. For known phone compatibility information, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

Page 224: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

224

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• track repeat off

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• track shuffle album shuffle off

iPod AUDIO

REPEATING

The track currently being listened to canbe repeated.

INFORMATION

● When is selected, “RPT” appearson the screen.

RANDOM ORDER

Tracks or albums can be automaticallyand randomly selected.

INFORMATION

● Each time is selected, “Shuffle”/“Alb.Shuffle” appears on the screen.

Page 225: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

225

3. MEDIA OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Options”.

2 Select the desired settings to change.iPod VIDEO

To change to iPod video mode, select“Browse” on the iPod audio screen, thenselect the “Videos” tab and select thedesired video file.

iPod VIDEO OPTIONS

No. Function Page

Select to change the screensize. 176

Select to display the imagequality adjustment screen. 177

Select to change audio set-tings. 240

Page 226: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

226

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

5. Bluetooth® AUDIO

The Bluetooth® audio system enables users to enjoy listening to music that is playedon a portable player on the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.

This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of playing por-table audio music without cables. If your device does not support Bluetooth®, theBluetooth® audio system will not function.

OVERVIEW

The Bluetooth® audio operation screen can be reached by the following methods:Depending on the type of portable player connected, some functions may not be avail-able and/or the screen may look differently than shown in this manual.Connecting a Bluetooth® audio device (P.230)

Using the instrument panelPress the “MEDIA” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Media” to display theaudio control screen.

Page 227: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

227

3. MEDIA OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ CONTROL SCREEN

■ CONTROL PANEL

Page 228: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

228

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

No. Function

Select to select an album.

Select to select a track.

Displays Bluetooth® device condition

Select to display the audio source selection screen.

Select to display the portable device connection screen.

Displays cover art Select to display a track list.

To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.

Select to display the playlist screen. To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.

Select to display the sound settings screen.

Select to set random playback.

Select to set repeat playback.

Shows progress

Select to play.

Select to pause.

Press to select a media mode. While in a media mode, pressing the “MEDIA” button changes media modes.

Turn to select a track. Turn to move up/down the list.

Press to select a track. Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio system.

Press to play/pause.

Page 229: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

229

3. MEDIA OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

WARNING

● Do not operate the player’s controls or connect to the Bluetooth® audio system while driv-ing.

● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pace-makers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverterdefibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and theBluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.

● Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implant-able cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantablecardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for informationabout its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpectedeffects on the operation of such medical devices.

NOTICE

● Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. In particular, high temperatures inside thevehicle may damage the portable player.

INFORMATION

● Depending on the Bluetooth® device that is connected to the system, the music may start

playing when selecting while it is paused. Conversely, the music may pause when

selecting while it is playing.● In the following conditions, the system may not function:

• The Bluetooth® device is turned off.

• The Bluetooth® device is not connected.

• The Bluetooth® device has a low battery.● It may take time to connect the phone when Bluetooth® audio is being played.●For operating the portable player, see the instruction manual that comes with it.

● If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected due to poor reception from the Bluetooth® net-work when the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system automaticallyreconnects the portable player.

●If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected on purpose, such as it was turned off, this does nothappen. Reconnect the portable player manually.

● Bluetooth® device information is registered when the Bluetooth® device is connected tothe Bluetooth® audio system. When selling or disposing of the vehicle, remove theBluetooth® audio information from the system. (P.71)

Page 230: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

230

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Registering an additional device

1 Select “Connect” on the Bluetooth®

audio control screen.

2 For more information: P.56

Selecting a registered device

1 Select “Connect” on the Bluetooth®

audio control screen.

2 For more information: P.58

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• track repeat album repeat off

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE

To use the Bluetooth® audio system, it isnecessary to register a Bluetooth® de-vice with the system.

LISTENING TO Bluetooth® AUDIO

REPEATING

The track or album currently being lis-tened to can be repeated.

INFORMATION

● Each time is selected, “RPT”/“ALB.RPT” appears on the screen.

Page 231: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

231

3. MEDIA OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select .

Each time is selected, the modechanges as follows:• album random all track random off

RANDOM ORDER

Tracks or albums can be automaticallyand randomly selected.

INFORMATION

● Each time is selected, “RAND”/“ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.

Page 232: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

232

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

6. AUX

■ CONTROL SCREEN

OVERVIEW

The AUX operation screen can be reached by the following methods:Connecting a device to the AUX port (P.173)

Using the instrument panelPress the “MEDIA” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Media” to display theaudio control screen.

Page 233: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

233

3. MEDIA OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ CONTROL PANEL

No. Function

Select to display the audio source selection screen.

Select to display the sound setting screen.

Press to select a media mode. While in a media mode, pressing the “MEDIA” button changes media modes.

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio system.

Press to turn mute on/off.

Page 234: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

234

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

WARNING

● Do not connect portable audio device or operate the controls while driving.

NOTICE

● Depending on the size and shape of the portable audio device that is connected to the sys-tem, the lid may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the lid as this may damagethe portable audio device or the terminal, etc.

● Do not leave portable audio device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle maybecome high, resulting in damage to the player.

● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable audio device while it isconnected as this may damage the portable audio device or its terminal.

● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable audio device orits terminal.

Page 235: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

235

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

7. VTR

■ CONTROL SCREEN

OVERVIEW

The VTR operation screen can be reached by the following methods:Connecting a device to the AUX port (P.173)

Using the instrument panelPress the “MEDIA” button to display the audio control screen.Using the Remote TouchPress the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Media” to display theaudio control screen.

Page 236: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

236

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ CONTROL PANEL

No. Function

Select to display the audio source selection screen.

Select to display the sound setting screen.

Select to display the audio setting screen.

Select to display the option screen. (P.237)

Select to display full screen video.

Press to select a media mode. While in a media mode, pressing the “MEDIA” button changes media modes.

Turn to adjust volume. Press to turn the audio system on/off. Press and hold to restart the audio system.

Press to turn mute on/off.

Page 237: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

237

3. MEDIA OPERATION

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Options”.

2 Select the desired settings to change.

VTR OPTIONS

No. Function Page

Select to change the screensize. 176

Select to display the imagequality adjustment screen. 177

Page 238: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

238

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.04 19:41

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

1. STEERING SWITCHES

“MODE” switch

“ ” switch

Some parts of the audio/visual system can be adjusted using the switches on the steer-ing wheel.

No. Switch

“MODE” switch

“ ” switch

Volume control switch

Mode Operation Function

AM, FM, SAT, AUX,

VTR

Press Change audio modes

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Mute

CD, MP3/WMA/AAC

disc, DVD, USB, iPod, BT audio,

APPS

Press Change audio modes

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Pause

Mode Operation Function

AM/FM Radio

Press Preset station up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more)

Seek up/down continuously while the switch is beingpressed

Page 239: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

239

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.04 19:41

Volume control switch

SAT

Press Preset channel up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Type seek up/down

Press and hold (1.5 sec. or more) Fast up/down

CD

Press Track up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind

MP3/WMA/AAC

disc

Press File up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind

DVD Press Chapter up/down

USB

Press File/Track up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind

iPod Press Track/File up/down

BT audio

Press Track up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Fast forward/rewind

Mode Operation Function

All

Press Volume up/down

Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more) Volume up/down continuously

Mode Operation Function

INFORMATION

● In the APPS mode, some operation may be done on the screen depend on the selectedAPPS.

Page 240: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

240

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

5. SETUP

1. AUDIO SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Audio”.

4 Select the items to be set.

Detailed audio settings can be pro-grammed.

Page 241: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

241

5. SETUP

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the audio setting screen.(P.240)

2 Select “iPod Settings”.

3 Select “Video Sound Input”.

4 Select a screen button for the desiredsetting.

AUDIO SETTINGS SCREEN

No. Function Page

Select to set the iPod audiosignal input settings. 241

Select to set the video sig-nal format settings. 242

Select to change the num-ber of preset radio stationsdisplayed on the screen.

242

Select to set detailed coverart settings. 243

*Select to set detailed DVDsettings. 243

*: Only in DVD video mode

iPod SETTINGS

Page 242: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

242

5. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the audio setting screen.(P.240)

2 Select “External Video Settings”.

3 Select “Video Signal Switch”.

4 Select a screen button for the desiredsetting.

1 Display the audio setting screen.(P.240)

2 Select “Number of Radio Presets”.

3 Select the button with the desired num-ber to be displayed.

“Default”: Select to default the settings.

EXTERNAL VIDEO SETTINGS SETTING THE NUMBER OF RADIO PRESETS

Page 243: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

243

5. SETUP

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the audio setting screen.(P.240)

2 Select “Cover Art Settings”.

3 Select the desired button to be set.

1 Display the audio setting screen.(P.240)

2 Select “DVD Settings”.Selecting “DVD Settings” on the DVD top

screen can also display “DVD Settings”screen. (P.207)

3 Select the items to be set.

When “Default” is selected, all menus areinitialized.

COVER ART SETTINGS

No. Function

Select on/off to set the cover art dis-play in DISC mode.

Select on/off to set the cover art dis-play in USB mode.

Select on/off to set the priority of theGracenote database in USB mode.

Select on/off to set the cover art dis-play in iPod mode.

Select on/off to set the priority of theGracenote database in iPod mode.

INFORMATION

● Images from the Gracenote databasedisplayed on the screen may be differentfrom the actual cover art.

DVD SETTINGS

Page 244: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

244

5. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ AUDIO LANGUAGE

1 Select “Audio Language”.

2 Select the desired language to be heardon the “Audio Language” screen.

If the desired language to be heard cannotbe found on this screen, select “Other” andenter a language code. (P.245)

■ SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

1 Select “Subtitle Language”.

2 Select the desired language to be readon the “Subtitle Language” screen.

If the desired language to be read cannotbe found on this screen, select “Other” andenter a language code. (P.245)

■ MENU LANGUAGE

1 Select “Menu Language”.

2 Select the desired language to be readon the “Menu Language” screen.

If the desired language to be read cannotbe found on this screen, select “Other” andenter a language code. (P.245)

■ ANGLE MARK

1 Select “Angle Mark”.

2 Select “On” or “Off”.

■ PARENTAL LOCK

1 Select “Parental Lock”.

2 Enter the 4-digit personal code on the“Key Code” screen.

3 Select a parental level (1-8) on the“Select Restriction Level” screen.

■ AUTO START

1 Select “Auto Start Playback”.

2 Select “On” or “Off”.

■ SOUND DYNAMIC RANGE

1 Select “Dynamic Range”.

2 Select “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”.

The audio language can be changed.

The subtitle language can be changed.

The language on the DVD video menucan be changed.

The multi-angle mark can be turned onor off on the screen while discs that aremulti-angle compatible are beingplayed.

The level of viewer restrictions can bechanged.

Discs that are inserted while the vehicleis in motion will automatically start play-ing. Certain discs may not play.

The difference between the lowest vol-ume and the highest volume can be ad-justed.

Page 245: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

245

5. SETUP

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ ENTER AUDIO/SUBTITLE/MENULANGUAGE CODE

1 Enter the 4-digit language code.

2 Select “OK”.

If “Other” on the “Audio Language”screen, “Subtitle Language” screen or“Menu Language” screen is selected,the desired language to be heard orread can be selected by entering a lan-guage code.

Code Language

0514 English

1001 Japanese

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

1620 Portuguese

1922 Swedish

1821 Russian

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0102 Abkhazian

0106 Afrikaans

0113 Amharic

0118 Arabic

0119 Assamese

0125 Aymara

0126 Azerbaijani

0201 Bashkir

0205 Byelorussian

0207 Bulgarian

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

Page 246: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

246

5. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

0214 Bengali, Bangla

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0315 Corsican

0319 Czech

0325 Welsh

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0515 Esperanto

0520 Estonian

0521 Basque

0601 Persian

0609 Finnish

0610 Fiji

0615 Faroese

0625 Frisian

0701 Irish

0704 Scottish-Gaelic

0712 Galician

0714 Guarani

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

Code Language

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0919 Icelandic

0923 Hebrew

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

1101 Georgian

1111 Kazakh

1112 Greenlandic

1113 Cambodian

1114 Kannada

1119 Kashmiri

1121 Kurdish

1125 Kirghiz

1201 Latin

1214 Lingala

1215 Laotian

1220 Lithuanian

1222 Latvian, Lettish

1307 Malagasy

1309 Maori

1311 Macedonian

1312 Malayalam

Code Language

Page 247: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

247

5. SETUP

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1314 Mongolian

1315 Moldavian

1318 Marathi

1319 Malay

1320 Maltese

1325 Burmese

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

1415 Norwegian

1503 Occitan

1513 (Afan) Oromo

1518 Oriya

1601 Panjabi

1612 Polish

1619 Pashto, Pushto

1721 Quechua

1813 Rhaeto-Romance

1814 Kirundi

1815 Romanian

1823 Kinyarwanda

1901 Sanskrit

1904 Sindhi

1907 Sango

1908 Serbo-Croatian

1909 Sinhalese

1911 Slovak

Code Language

1912 Slovenian

1913 Samoan

1914 Shona

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

1918 Serbian

1919 Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921 Sundanese

1923 Swahili

2001 Tamil

2005 Telugu

2007 Tajik

2008 Thai

2009 Tigrinya

2011 Turkmen

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

2015 Tongan

2018 Turkish

2019 Tsonga

2020 Tatar

2023 Twi

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2126 Uzbek

Code Language

Page 248: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

248

5. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

2209 Vietnamese

2215 Volapük

2315 Wolof

2408 Xhosa

2515 Yoruba

2621 Zulu

Code Language

Page 249: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

249

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

1. OPERATING INFORMATION

NOTICE

● To avoid damage to the audio/visual sys-tem:• Be careful not to spill beverages over

the audio/visual system.• Do not put anything other than an

appropriate disc into the disc slot.

INFORMATION

● The use of a cellular phone inside or nearthe vehicle may cause a noise from thespeakers of the audio/visual system whichyou are listening to. However, this doesnot indicate a malfunction.

RADIO

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withthe radio — it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.For example, nearby buildings and ter-rain can interfere with FM reception.Power lines or phone wires can interferewith AM signals. And of course, radiosignals have a limited range. The fartherthe vehicle is from a station, the weakerits signal will be. In addition, receptionconditions change constantly as the ve-hicle moves.Here, some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate aproblem with the radio are described.

Page 250: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

250

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Fading and drifting stations: Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 25 miles (40km). Once outside this range, you may no-tice fading and drifting, which increase withthe distance from the radio transmitter.They are often accompanied by distortion.Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, mak-ing it possible for 2 signals to reach the vehi-cle’s antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each otherout, causing a momentary flutter or loss ofreception.Static and fluttering: These occur when sig-nals are blocked by buildings, trees or otherlarge objects. Increasing the bass level mayreduce static and fluttering.Station swapping: If the FM signal being lis-tened to is interrupted or weakened, andthere is another strong station nearby onthe FM band, the radio may tune in the sec-ond station until the original signal can bepicked up again.

Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by theupper atmosphere — especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to sound al-ternately strong and weak.Station interference: When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from a ra-dio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with each oth-er, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.Static: AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as high ten-sion power lines, lightening or electricalmotors. This results in static.

FM AM

Page 251: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

251

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier,especially metal objects, may adverselyaffect the reception of XM Satellite Radio.Alternation or modifications carried out

without appropriate authorization mayinvalidate the user’s right to operate theequipment.

This DVD player is intended for use with4.7 in. (12 cm). discs only.Extremely high temperatures can keep the

DVD player from working. On hot days,use the air conditioning system to cool theinside of the vehicle before using the player.Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make

the DVD player skip. If moisture gets into the DVD player, the

discs may not be able to be played. Removethe discs from the player and wait until itdries.

Use only discs marked as shown above.The following products may not be playableon your player:• SACD• dts CD• Copy-protected CD• DVD audio• Video CD• DVD-RAM

XM

DVD PLAYER AND DISC

WARNING

● DVD players use an invisible laser beamwhich could cause hazardous radiationexposure if directed outside the unit. Besure to operate the player correctly.

DVD PLAYER

Audio CDs

DVD video discs

DVD-R/RW discs

Page 252: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

252

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

NOTICE

● Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or labeled discssuch as those shown in the illustrations.The use of such discs may damage theplayer, or it may be impossible to eject thedisc.

● This system is not designed for use ofDual Discs. Do not use Dual Discsbecause they may cause damage to theplayer.

● Do not use discs with a protection ring.The use of such discs may damage theplayer, or it may be impossible to eject thedisc.

● Do not use printable discs. The use ofsuch discs may damage the player, or itmay be impossible to eject the disc.

Page 253: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

253

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Handle discs carefully, especially wheninserting them. Hold them on the edge anddo not bend them. Avoid getting finger-prints on them, particularly on the shinyside.Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or other

disc damage could cause the player to skipor to repeat a section of a track. (To see apin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)Remove discs from the players when not in

use. Store them in their plastic cases awayfrom moisture, heat and direct sunlight.

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-freecloth that has been dampened with water.Wipe in a straight line from the center to theedge of the disc (not in circles). Dry it withanother soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use aconventional record cleaner or anti-staticdevice.

CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not beensubject to the “finalizing process” (a pro-cess that allows discs to be played on aconventional CD player) cannot be played. It may not be possible to play CD-R/

CD-RW discs recorded on a music CDrecorder or a personal computer becauseof disc characteristics, scratches or dirt onthe disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on thelens of the unit. It may not be possible to play discs

recorded on a personal computer depend-ing on the application settings and the envi-ronment. Record with the correct format.(For details, contact the appropriate appli-cation manufacturers of the applications.)CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by

direct exposure to sunlight, high tempera-tures or other storage conditions. The unitmay be unable to play some damageddiscs. If you insert a CD-RW disc into the player,

playback will begin more slowly than with aconventional CD or CD-R disc.Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be

played using the DDCD (Double DensityCD) system.

Correct Wrong

CD-R/RW AND DVD-R/RW DISCS

Page 254: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

254

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Region codes: Some DVD video discs havethe following region code indicating whichcountries the DVD video disc can be playedin on this DVD player. If you attempt to playan inappropriate DVD video disc on thisplayer, error message appears on thescreen. Even if the DVD video disc does nothave a region code, there are cases when itcannot be used.

■ MARKS SHOWN ON DVD VIDEODISCS

DVD VIDEO DISCS

This DVD player conforms to NTSC/PAL color TV formats. DVD video discsconforming to another format such asSECAM cannot be used.

Code Country

All All countries

1 North America

NTSC/PAL Indicates NTSC/PALformat of color TV.

Indicates the numberof audio tracks.

Indicates the numberof language subtitles.

Indicates the numberof angles.

Indicates the screen tobe selected.Wide screen: 16:9Standard: 4:3

Indicates a regioncode by which this vid-eo disc can be played.ALL: in all countriesNumber: region code

Page 255: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

255

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc thatholds video. DVD video discs have adopted“MPEG2”, one of the world standards ofdigital compression technologies. The pic-ture data is compressed by 1/40 on aver-age and stored. Variable rate encodedtechnology in which the volume of data as-signed to the picture is changed dependingon the picture format has also been adopt-ed. Audio data is stored using PCM andDolby Digital, which enables higher qualityof sound. Furthermore, multi-angle andmulti-language features will also help usersenjoy the more advanced technology ofDVD video.Viewer restrictions: This feature limits whatcan be viewed in conformity with a level ofrestrictions of the country. The level of re-strictions varies depending on the DVD vid-eo disc. Some DVD video discs cannot beplayed at all, or violent scenes are skippedor replaced with other scenes.

• Level 1: DVD video discs for children canbe played.

• Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for childrenand G-rated movie can be played.

• Level 8: All types of the DVD video discscan be played.

Multi-angle feature: The same scene canbe enjoyed from different angles.Multi-language feature: The subtitle andaudio language can be selected.Region codes: The region codes are pro-vided on DVD players and DVD discs. If theDVD video disc does not have the same re-gion code as the DVD player, you cannotplay the disc on the DVD player. For regioncodes: (P.254)Audio: This DVD player can play linerPCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio for-mat DVDs. Other decoded types cannot beplayed.Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-grams stored in DVD video discs are divid-ed into parts by title and chapter.Title: The largest unit of the video and audioprograms stored on DVD video discs. Usu-ally, one movie, one album, or one audioprogram is assigned as a title.Chapter: A unit smaller than that of title. Atitle comprises of several chapters.

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY

Manufactured under license from DolbyLaboratories. Dolby and the double-Dsymbol are trademarks of DolbyLaboratories.

Page 256: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

256

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

“Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone” and“Made for iPad” mean that an electronicaccessory has been designed to connectspecifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respec-tively, and has been certified by the devel-oper to meet Apple performancestandards. Apple is not responsible for the operation

of this device or its compliance with safetyand regulatory standards. Please note thatthe use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone,or iPad may affect wireless performance. iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,

and iPod touch are trademarks of AppleInc., registered in the U.S. and other coun-tries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.The Lightning connector works with

iPhone 5, iPod touch (5th generation), andiPod nano (7th generation).The 30-pin connector works with iPhone

4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G,iPhone, iPod touch (1st through 4th genera-tion), iPod classic, and iPod nano (1stthrough 6th generation).USB works with iPhone 5, iPhone 4S,

iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone,iPod touch (1st through 5th generation),iPod classic, and iPod nano (1st through 7thgeneration).

Bluetooth® technology works with iPhone5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS,iPhone 3G, iPhone, and iPod touch (2ndthrough 5th generation).

The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPodclassic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devic-es can be used with this system.Made for

• iPod touch (5th generation)*• iPod touch (4th generation)• iPod touch (3rd generation)• iPod touch (2nd generation)• iPod touch (1st generation)• iPod classic• iPod with video• iPod nano (7th generation)*• iPod nano (6th generation)• iPod nano (5th generation)• iPod nano (4th generation)• iPod nano (3rd generation)• iPod nano (2nd generation)• iPod nano (1st generation)• iPhone 5*• iPhone 4S• iPhone 4• iPhone 3GS• iPhone 3G• iPhone

*: iPod video not supported

iPod COMPATIBLE MODELS

INFORMATION

● Depending on differences between mod-els or software versions etc., some mod-els might be incompatible with thissystem.

Page 257: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

257

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ COMPATIBLE USB DEVICES

■ COMPATIBLE COMPRESSEDFILES

■ CORRESPONDING SAMPLINGFREQUENCY

■ CORRESPONDING BIT RATES

(Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible)

FILE INFORMATION

USB communicationformats

USB 2.0 HS(480 Mbps) andFS (12 Mbps)

File formats FAT 16/32

Correspondence class Mass storageclass

Item USB DISC

Compatiblefile format(audio)

MP3/WMA/AAC

Folders in thedevice

Maximum 3000

Maximum192

Files in thedevice

Maximum 9999

Maximum255

Files per folder

Maximum 255

File type Frequency (kHz)

MP3 files: MPEG 1 LAYER 3 32/44.1/48

MP3 files: MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 16/22.05/24

WMA files: Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) 32/44.1/48

AAC files: MPEG4/AAC-LC

11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48

File type Bit rate (kbps)

MP3 files:MPEG 1 LAYER 3 32 - 320

MP3 files:MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3 8 - 160

WMA files: Ver. 7, 8 CBR 48 - 192

WMA files:Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2) CBR 48 - 320

AAC files:MPEG4/AAC-LC 16 - 320

Page 258: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

258

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA(Windows Media Audio) and AAC(Advanced Audio Coding) are audio com-pression standards.This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC

files on CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-RWdiscs and USB memory.This system can play disc recordings com-

patible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2and with the Romeo and Joliet file system.When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file,

add an appropriate file extension (.mp3/.wma/.m4a). This system plays back files with .mp3/

.wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/AAC files respectively. To prevent noiseand playback errors, use the appropriatefile extension.This system can play only the first session

when using multi-session compatible CDs.MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 Tag

Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3 for-mats. This system cannot display disc title,track title and artist name in other formats.WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/

AAC tag that is used in the same way as anID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags carry informa-tion such as track title and artist name.The emphasis function is available only

when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at32, 44.1 and 48 kHz.This system can play back AAC files

encoded by iTunes.The sound quality of MP3/WMA files gen-

erally improves with higher bit rates. Inorder to achieve a reasonable level ofsound quality, discs recorded with a bit rateof at least 128 kbps are recommended.

M3u playlists are not compatible with theaudio player.MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO

formats are not compatible with the audioplayer.The player is compatible with VBR (Vari-

able Bit Rate).When playing back files recorded as VBR

(Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time willnot be correctly displayed if the fast for-ward or reverse operations are used. It is not possible to check folders that do not

include MP3/WMA/AAC files.MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8

levels deep can be played. However, thestart of playback may be delayed whenusing discs containing numerous levels offolders. For this reason, we recommendcreating discs with no more than 2 levels offolders.

Page 259: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

259

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

The play order of the compact disc with thestructure shown above is as follows:

The order changes depending on the per-sonal computer and MP3/WMA/AACencoding software you use.

This is a general term that describes theprocess of writing data on-demand toCD-R, etc., in the same way that data iswritten to floppy or hard discs.

This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. Thisembedded information can include thetrack number, track title, the artist’s name,the album title, the music genre, the year ofproduction, comments, cover art and otherdata. The contents can be freely editedusing software with ID3 tag editing func-tions. Although the tags are restricted to anumber of characters, the information canbe viewed when the track is played back.

WMA files can contain a WMA tag that isused in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMAtags carry information such as track titleand artist name.

001.mp3 002.wma

Folder 1003.mp3Folder 2004.mp3005.wma

Folder 3006.m4a

001.mp3 002.wma . . . 006.m4a

TERMS

PACKET WRITE

ID3 TAG

WMA TAG

Page 260: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

260

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

This is the international standard for the for-matting of CD-ROM folders and files. Forthe ISO 9660 format, there are 2 levels ofregulations.Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8

character file names, with a 3 character fileextension. File names must be composed ofone-byte capital letters and numbers. The“_” symbol may also be included.)Level 2: The file name can have up to 31

characters (including the separation mark“.” and file extension). Each folder mustcontain fewer than 8 hierarchies.

Playlists created using “WINAMP” soft-ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MP3 is an audio compression standarddetermined by a working group (MPEG) ofthe ISO (International Standard Organiza-tion). MP3 compresses audio data to about1/10 the size of that on conventional discs.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audiocompression format developed byMicrosoft®. It compresses files into a sizesmaller than that of MP3 files. The decod-ing formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and9.

AAC is short for Advanced Audio Codingand refers to an audio compression tech-nology standard used with MPEG2 andMPEG4.

ISO 9660 FORMAT

m3u

MP3

WMA

AAC

Page 261: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

261

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

4

AU

DIO

/VISU

AL SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

ERROR MESSAGES

Mode Message Explanation

CD/DVD

“No disc found.” It indicates that there is no disc in the DVD play-er.

“Check disc”

It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or itwas inserted upside down. Clean the disc or in-sert it correctly.It indicates a disc which is not playable is insert-ed.

“DISC Error” There is a trouble inside the system.Eject the disc.

“Region Code Error” It indicates that the DVD region code is not setproperly.

USB

“USB Error” This indicates a problem in the USB memory orits connection.

“No music files found.” This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC filesare included in the USB memory.

iPod

“iPod Error.” This indicates a problem in the iPod or its con-nection.

“No music files found.” This indicates that there is no music data in theiPod.

“No video files found.” This indicates that no video files are included inthe iPod.

“Please check the iPodfirmware version.”

This indicates that the software version is notcompatible. Perform the iPod firmware updatesand try again.

“iPod authorization failed.” This indicates that it failed to authorize the iPod.Please check your iPod.

Bluetooth® Audio

“Music tracks not support-ed. Please check your por-table player.”

This indicates a problem in the Bluetooth® de-vice.

Page 262: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

262

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

INFORMATION

● If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

Page 263: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

5

263

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:44

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM ......... 264

USING THE VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM .................................................................. 264

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION ....................................................... 265

EXPANDED VOICE COMMANDS ............ 271

2. CASUAL SPEECH RECOGNIZATION ........ 272

3. COMMAND LIST................................... 274

1. MOBILE ASSISTANT ............................ 278

1 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

2 MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

Page 264: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

264

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

Talk switchPress the talk switch to start the voice com-

mand system.To cancel voice recognition, press and hold

the talk switch.

It is unnecessary to speak directly into themicrophone when giving a command.

The voice command system enables thenavigation, audio/visual, hands-free andair conditioning systems to be operatedusing voice commands.Refer to the command list for samples ofvoice commands. (P.274)

USING THE VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

STEERING SWITCH

MICROPHONE

INFORMATION

● Wait for the confirmation beep beforespeaking a command.

● Voice commands may not be recognizedif:• Spoken too quickly.• Spoken at a low or high volume.• The roof or windows are open.• Passengers are talking while voice com-

mands are spoken.• The air conditioning speed is set high.• The air conditioning vents are turned

towards the microphone.● In the following conditions, the system

may not recognize the command prop-erly and using voice commands may notbe possible:• The command is incorrect or unclear.

Note that certain words, accents orspeech patterns may be difficult for thesystem to recognize.

• There is excessive background noise,such as wind noise.

Page 265: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

265

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

5

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say the tab selection command or se-lect the desired tab.

Commands related with each function aredisplayed on the screen of the each func-tion tab. Some commonly used commandsare displayed on the screen of the shortcuttab. Say “More Hints” to display more com-monly used commands.

3 Say the desired command.

Registered POIs, registered names in thecontacts list etc., can be said in the place ofthe “<>” next to the commands. (P.274)For example: Say “Find nearby dining”,“Call John Smith” etc. If a desired outcome is not shown, or if no

selections are available, perform one of thefollowing to return to the previous screen:• Say “Go back”.• Select “Go Back”.To cancel voice recognition, select

, or press and hold the talk switch.

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

The voice command system is operatedby speaking commands correspondingto each function. Also you can confirmthe each command by selecting a tab.The tabs are found on the upper part ofthe screen.All commands that are not displayed onthe screen can be recognized on anyscreens.

Voice guidance for the voice commandsystem can be skipped by pressing thetalk switch.

Saying “Help” prompts voice guidance tooffer examples of commands and opera-tion methods.

Page 266: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

266

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ DISPLAYING THE “Voice Settings”SCREENS

Selecting can be displayed the“Voice Settings” screen. (P.72)

INFORMATION

● If the navigation system does not respondor the confirmation screen does not dis-appear, press the talk switch and tryagain.

● If a voice command cannot be recog-nized, voice guidance will say “Pardon?”(“Command not recognized.” will be dis-played on the screen) and voice com-mand reception will restart.

● If a voice command cannot be recog-nized 2 consecutive times, the voicecommand guidance system will say“Paused. To restart voice recognition,please push the talk switch. To cancelvoice recognition, please push and holdthe talk switch.” Then voice recognitionwill be suspended.

● “Voice Recognition Prompts” can be setto on or off on the “Voice Settings”screen. (P.73)

● Voice guidance can be canceled by set-ting voice prompts to off. Use this settingwhen it is desirable to say a commandimmediately after pressing the talk switchand hearing a beep.

Page 267: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

267

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

5

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say “Launch <application name>”.

LEXUS App Suite application screen is dis-played.

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say “Enter an address”.

3 Say “<house number, street name, cityname, State>” continuously.

A confirmation screen will be displayedshowing the recognition results. If multiplematching items are found, a selectionscreen will be displayed. Say “<number>” orselect the number.Some areas cannot be recognized by the

voice recognition system.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: LAUNCH LEXUS App Suite APPLICATION

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: PERFORMING A DESTINATION SEARCH BY ADDRESS (ENGLISH ONLY)

For information regarding the state/province setting to perform a destinationsearch by address: P.108

Page 268: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

268

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

4 Say “Go directly”.

After this, follow the voice guidance andsearch for a destination route by voicecommand operation.

INFORMATION

● The voice command recognition isdesigned to recognize the main body ofthe official street name.

For example: if the official street name is“East Main Street”, the voice commandrecognition will recognize “Main”.● Say the desired number, cardinal direc-

tion etc. in the place of the “<>”.For example: Say “West 555”.● Inputting the house number can be

skipped.● Even if the state set using voice recogni-

tion is different from the set state in the“Address” screen (which was set when adestination was set manually), the setstate in the “Address” screen will notchange. (P.110)

● The house number voice recognitionconditions are outlined below:• Numerals: 10 digits or less• Numerals and cardinal direction or a

hyphen and numerals: A total of 9 dig-its or less (Do not say “and”.)

• Cardinal direction or a hyphen andnumerals: A total of 9 digits or less(Do not say “and”.)

• Numerals are recognized as singledigits only.

• The cardinal direction and hyphensare only recognized once.

• The following cardinal directions canbe recognized: North, East, West andSouth.

Page 269: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

269

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

5

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say “Play song <name>”.A confirmation screen will be displayed

showing the recognition results. If multiplematching items are found, a selectionscreen will be displayed. Say “<number>” orselect the number.The system starts playing music and the

song lists are displayed.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: SEARCH FOR A SONG

INFORMATION

● The Gracenote database is only compati-ble with the USB or iPod mode.

● The list screens can be operated byselecting using the Remote Touch as wellas by recognizing the voice commands.

● A USB memory or iPod must be con-nected to enable track searching andplayback. (P.214, 219)

● When a USB memory or iPod is con-nected, recognition data is created sotracks can be searched using voice com-mands.

● Recognition data is updated under thefollowing conditions:• When the USB memory or iPod data

has changed.• When the voice recognition language is

changed. (P.64)● While the recognition data is being cre-

ated or being updated, a track searchcannot be performed using a voice com-mand.

● When the “Music” tab is disappeared onthe shortcut menu screen, it is not possi-ble to search for a track using a voicecommand.

Page 270: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

270

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say “Call <contacts> <phone types>”.A confirmation screen will be displayed

showing the recognition results. If multiplematching items are found, a selectionscreen will be displayed. Say “<number>” orselect the number.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: CALL NAME

INFORMATION

● In the same manner as it is displayed onthe screen, “Call <contacts> <phonetypes>”, after saying “Call a contact” saythe name, or the name and type of phone,of a contact.For example: “Call a contact”, “JohnSmith” or “Call a contact”, “Mary Davis”,“Mobile”

● There are 4 types of phones: Home,Mobile, Office and Other.

● Short or abbreviated names in the con-tacts list may not be recognized. Changenames in the contacts list to full names.

● Sometimes a voice recognition resultconfirmation screen will be displayed.After confirming the result, say “Yes” or“No”.

● When the system recognizes multiplenames from the contacts list, a name can-didate list will be displayed on the screen.If the desired name is not displayed on thetop of the screen, say or select the num-ber of the name from the candidate list toselect a name from the candidate list.

● When a contact has multiple phone num-bers registered in the contacts list, a can-didate list will be displayed. If the desiredphone number is not displayed on the topof the screen, say or select the number ofthe desired phone number from the can-didate list to select a phone number fromthe candidate list.

Page 271: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

271

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

5

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Press the talk switch.

2 Say the phone number. In the same manner as it is displayed on the

screen, “Dial <number>”, after saying “Diala number” say the phone number. Say the phone number one digit at a time.

For example, if the phone number is2345678:Say “two three four five six seven eight”

3 When the confirmation screen appears,say “Yes” or select “Yes” or press the switch on the steering wheel.

Calling to other phone numbers

3 Say “Call” or press the switch on thesteering wheel.

VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: DIAL NUMBER

When the system recognizes multiplephone numbers, a phone number candi-date list will be displayed on the screen.Pressing the switch on the steeringwheel makes a call to the top entry on thelist. If the desired phone number is notdisplayed on the top of the screen, saythe number of the desired phone numberfrom the candidate list to select a phonenumber from the candidate list.

EXPANDED VOICE COMMANDS

Selecting “On” next to “ExpandedVoice Commands” on the “VoiceSettings” screen enables expandedvoice commands operation. (P.72)Expanded voice commands are dis-played on the screen of the “Other” tab.Expanded voice commands are listed inthe table (P.274)

INFORMATION

● The “Other” tab is not displayed when“Expanded Voice Commands” is “Off”.

Page 272: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

272

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

2. CASUAL SPEECH RECOGNIZATION

Due to natural language speech recog-nition technology, this system enablesrecognition of a command when spokennaturally. However, the system cannotrecognize every variation of each com-mand. In some situations, it is possible toomit the command for the procedureand directly state the desired operation.Not all voice commands are displayed inthe short cut menu.

INFORMATION

● If the command cannot be recognizedcompletely, the command input screenwill be displayed. (Search results will beshown based on the part of the commandthat was recognized.)

Page 273: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

273

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

5

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

EXPRESSION EXAMPLES FOR EACH FUNCTION

Command Expression examples

“Go Home” Navigate to my house.Take me home.

“Enter an Address”

I need a route to a streetaddress.Give me a street.

“Find <POI category>”

Search for a <Restau-rants> around here.I need a route to a near-by <Restaurants>.

“Call <name><type>”

Get me <RobertBrown>.Contact the <RobertBrown> phone of<Work>.

“Dial <number>”Can you get me<3334445555>.Ring <3334445555>.

“Play Artist <name>”

Play the artist <name>. I want to hear the band<name>.

“Play Album <name>”

Play album <name>. Switch to the album<name>.

Page 274: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

274

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3. COMMAND LIST

Frequently used commands are listed in the following tables. For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands will not be dis-

played in the screen. Also, according to conditions, other commands may not be dis-played in the screen.

The functions available may vary according to the navigation system installed.

Basic

AppsWhen the voice recognition language is set to English.

Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.

Voice recognition language can be changed. (P.64)

Command Action

“Help” Prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commandsor operation methods

“Go Back” Returns to the previous screen

“Go to <tab>” Displays the command list of the selected tab

“More Hints” Displays more commonly used commands

“Cancel” Cancels the voice command system

Command Action

“Launch <apps>” Activates the LEXUS App Suite application

Page 275: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

275

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

5

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Navi

*1: For example; “Gas stations”, “Restaurants”, etc.*2: Depending on the search results, a POI list may be provided by a relevant POI applica-

tion of the LEXUS App suite. (P. 363)

Phone

Command Action

“Find <POI category>” Displays a list of <POI category*1> near the current posi-tion*2

“Enter an Address” Enables setting a destination by saying the address

“Go Home” Displays the route to home

“Pause Guidance” Stops the route guidance

“Resume Guidance” Resumes the route guidance

“Show <POI> icons” Displays the specified POI icons

“Delete Destination” Deletes the destination

“Previous Destination” Displays previous destinations

Command Action

“Redial” Places a call to the phone number of the latest outgoingcall

“Call Back” Places a call to the phone number of latest incoming call

“Show Recent Calls” Displays the call history screen

“Dial <phone number>” Places a call to the said phone number

“Call <contacts> <phonetypes>” Place a call to the said phone type of the contact from thephone book

Page 276: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

276

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Radio

Audio

Info

Command Action

“Tune to <frequency> AM” Changes the radio to the specified AM frequency

“Tune to <frequency> FM” Changes the radio to the specified FM frequency

“Play <genre> station” Changes the radio to an FM station of the specified genre

“Tune to FM <frequency> HD <number>” Changes the radio to the specified HD radio station

“Tune to preset <number>” Changes the radio to the specified preset radio station

“Tune to <name>” Changes the radio to the satellite radio channel with thespecified name

“Tune to channel <number>” Changes the radio to the specified satellite radio channelnumber

“Play <genre> satellite station” Changes the radio to a satellite radio channel of the spec-ified genre

Command Action

“Play Playlist <name>” Plays tracks from the selected playlist

“Play Artist <name>” Plays tracks from the selected artist

“Play Song <name>” Plays the selected track

“Play Album <name>” Plays tracks from the selected album

Command Action

“Destination Assist” Connects the system to the Lexus Enform with SafetyConnect response center

“Show Forecast” Displays weather information

“Show Traffic” Displays traffic information

“Lexus Insider” Displays the Lexus insider list

Page 277: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

277

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

5

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

OtherWhen “Expanded Voice Commands” is turned “On”. (P.72)

*1: Only within the possible temperature range of the air conditioning system*2: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Command Action

“Turn Climate Control On” Turns air conditioning system on

“Turn Climate Control Off” Turns air conditioning system off

“Warmer” Increases the temperature of the air conditioning system

“Cooler” Decreases the temperature of the air conditioning system

“<#> degrees” Changes the set temperature of the air conditioning sys-tem to <#> degrees*1

“Turn Music On” Turns the audio system on

“Turn Music Off” Turns the audio system off

“AM Radio” Selects AM radio mode

“FM Radio” Selects FM radio mode

“Sirius XM” Selects satellite radio mode

“Disc” Selects the selected disc mode

“USB” Selects USB audio mode

“iPod” Selects iPod audio mode

“Bluetooth*2 Audio” Selects Bluetooth® audio mode

“A.V.” Selects VTR mode

“Auxiliary” Selects AUX audio mode

INFORMATION

● Commands relating to operation of the audio/visual and air conditioning systems can onlybe performed when the audio and air conditioning systems are turned on.

Page 278: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

278

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION

1. MOBILE ASSISTANT

1 Press and hold this switch until you hearthe beeps.

2 The Mobile Assistant can be used onlywhen the following screen is displayed.

To cancel the Mobile Assistant, select“Cancel”, or press and hold the on thesteering wheel.To restart the Mobile Assistant for addi-

tional commands, press the on thesteering wheel.• Mobile Assistant can only be restarted

after the system responds to a voice com-mand.

• After some phone and music commands,the Mobile Assistant feature will automat-ically end to complete the requestedaction.

The Mobile Assistant feature willactivate Apple’s Siri® Eyes Free modevia the steering wheel switches. Tooperate the Mobile Assistant, acompatible cellular phone must beregistered and connected to this systemvia Bluetooth®. (P.46)

The volume of the Mobile Assistant canbe adjusted using the “PWR·VOL” knobor steering wheel volume controlswitches. The Mobile Assistant andphone call volumes are synchronized.

INFORMATION

●The available features and functions mayvary based on the iOS version installedon the connected device.

●Some Siri features are limited in EyesFree mode. If you attempt to use anunavailable function, Siri will inform youthat the function is not available.

●If Siri is not enabled on the cellular phoneconnected via Bluetooth®, an error mes-sage will be displayed on the screen.

●While a phone call is active, the MobileAssistant cannot be used.

●If using the navigation feature of the cellu-lar phone, ensure the active audio sourceis Bluetooth® audio or iPod in order tohear turn by turn direction prompts.

Page 279: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

279

2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION

5

VO

ICE C

OM

MA

ND

SYSTEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

MICROPHONE

It is not necessary to speak directly intothe microphone when using the MobileAssistant. (Microphone location: P.264)

INFORMATION

●Wait for the listening beeps before usingthe Mobile Assistant.

●The Mobile Assistant may not recognizecommands in the following situations:• Spoken too quickly.• Spoken at a low or high volume.• The roof or windows are open.• Passengers are talking while the Mobile

Assistant is being used.• The air conditioning speed is set high.• The air conditioning vents are turned

toward the microphone.

Page 280: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

280

2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Page 281: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

6

281

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.04 19:41

1. RECEIVING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION .................................. 282

DISPLAYING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION................................................. 282

2. DATA SERVICES SETTINGS ............. 284

SETTING DOWNLOAD METHODS ........ 284

1 INFORMATION DISPLAY

INFORMATION

Page 282: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

282

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

1. RECEIVING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Info”.

3 Select “Weather”.

4 Check that the “Weather” screen is dis-played.

Doppler weather radar information canbe received via the HD Radio or by theLEXUS App Suite application on aBluetooth® phone. For details about theLEXUS App Suite application: P.356

DISPLAYING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION

No. Function

Select to display the weather of thecurrent location. (P.283)

Select to display the weather of a de-sired location in the recentlychecked locations list.

Select to display the weather of a de-sired location in the national citieslist.

Select to display the weather of a de-sired location in the other local citieslist.

Select to display Doppler weatherradar information over the map.

Page 283: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

283

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

6

INFO

RM

ATIO

N

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Weather” screen.(P.282)

2 Select “Current Weather”.

3 Select the desired tab to be displayed.

When the “Current” tab is selected

When the “3 Day” tab is selected

When a specific day is selected, weatherinformation for that day will be displayed.

When the “6/12 Hour” tab is selectedDISPLAYING THE WEATHER OF THE CURRENT LOCATION

INFORMATION

● If weather is set to the home screen, theweather screen of the current locationwill be displayed.

Page 284: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

284

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

2. DATA SERVICES SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Data Services Settings”.

4 Select the desired item to be set.

Select a checkbox on the right to set.

SETTING DOWNLOAD METHODS

Data service information, which is com-prised of traffic information and weatherinformation, can be received via the HDRadio and by the LEXUS App Suite ap-plication on a Bluetooth® phone. Thereceiving method can be set to both oronly via the HD Radio. For details aboutthe LEXUS App Suite application:P.356

No. Function

Select to receive data service infor-mation via both the HD Radio andthe LEXUS App Suite application ona Bluetooth® phone. When bothmethods are available, the HD Radiowill be selected.

Select to receive data only via theHD Radio.

Page 285: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

7

285

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.04 19:41

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR ............................................. 286

LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR...... 286

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS .............................. 286

SCREEN DISPLAY ............................................... 288

USING THE SYSTEM.......................................... 289

2. ESTIMATED COURSE LINE DISPLAY MODE .................................. 291

SCREEN DESCRIPTION .................................... 291

PARKING .................................................................. 292

3. PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE ................................. 293

SCREEN DESCRIPTION .................................. 293

PARKING .................................................................. 294

4. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PRECAUTIONS .......... 295

AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN ................ 295

THE CAMERA ........................................................ 296

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE SCREEN AND THE ACTUAL ROAD .......................... 297

WHEN APPROACHING THREE-DIMENSIONAL OBJECTS .......................... 298

5. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW .... 300

IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS.......... 300

1 LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 286: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

286

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

The parking assist monitor assists thedriver by displaying an image of the viewbehind the vehicle while backing up, forexample while parking.

INFORMATION

●The screen illustrations used in this textare intended as examples, and may differfrom the image that is actually displayedon the screen.

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

The parking assist monitor is a supple-mental device intended to assist thedriver when backing up. When backingup, be sure to visually check all aroundthe vehicle both directly and using themirrors before proceeding. If you donot, you may hit another vehicle, andcould possibly cause an accident.Pay attention to the following precau-tions when using the parking assist mon-itor.

WARNING

●Never depend on the parking assist mon-itor entirely when backing up. The imageand the position of the guide lines dis-played on the screen may differ from theactual state.Use caution, just as you would whenbacking up any vehicle.

●Be sure to back up slowly, depressing thebrake pedal to control vehicle speed.

●If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles,obstacles, people or mount the shoulder,depress the brake pedal to stop the vehi-cle.

●The instructions given are only guidelines.When and how much to turn the steeringwheel will vary according to traffic condi-tions, road surface conditions, vehiclecondition, etc. when parking. It is neces-sary to be fully aware of this before usingthe parking assist system.

●When parking, be sure to check that theparking space will accommodate yourvehicle before maneuvering into it.

Page 287: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

287

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

7

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

WARNING

●Do not use the parking assist monitor sys-tem in the following cases:• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow• When using tire chains or emergency

tires• When the back door is not closed com-

pletely• On roads that are not flat or straight,

such as curves or slopes.●In low temperatures, the screen may

darken or the image may become faint.The image could distort when the vehicleis moving, or you may become unable tosee the image on the screen. Be sure tovisually check all around the vehicle bothdirectly and using the mirrors before pro-ceeding.

●If the tire sizes are changed, the positionof the guide lines displayed on the screenmay change.

●The camera uses a special lens. The dis-tances between objects and pedestriansthat appear in the image displayed on thescreen will differ from the actual dis-tances. (P.297)

Page 288: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

288

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Intuitive parking assist

If an obstacle is detected while the intuitive parking assist is on, a display is shown in thetop right corner of the screen.

SCREEN DISPLAY

The parking assist monitor screen will be displayed if the shift position is shifted to “R”while the power switch is in ON mode.

CANCELING LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

The parking assist monitor is canceled when the shift position is shifted into any posi-tion other than the “R”.

Page 289: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

289

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

7

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Estimated course line display mode (P.291)

Parking assist guide line display mode (P.293)

Distance guide line display mode

USING THE SYSTEM

Use any of the following modes.

Estimated course lines are displayedwhich move in accordance with the op-eration of the steering wheel.

The steering wheel return points (park-ing assist guide lines) are displayed.

Distance guide lines only are displayed.

Page 290: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

290

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Press the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Vehicle”.

4 Select “Back Camera Guide LineSetting”.

5 Select the display mode.

SWITCHING THE DISPLAY MODE

When the shift position is in any positionother than “R”, the display mode can bechanged in the following procedure.

No. Name Detail

Estimated courseline display mode 291

Parking assistguide line displaymode

293

Distance guideline display mode

Distance guidelines only aredisplayed.

Page 291: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

291

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

7

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

2. ESTIMATED COURSE LINE DISPLAY MODE

SCREEN DESCRIPTION

No. Display Function

Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backedstraight up. The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle

width. These guide lines align with the estimated course lines

when the vehicle is going straight ahead.

Estimated course lines Show a estimated course when the steering wheel isturned.

Distance guide lines

Show distance behind the vehicle when the steering wheelis turned. The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated

course lines. The guide lines display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5

m) (red) and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from thecenter of the edge of the bumper.

Distance guide lineShows distance behind the vehicle. Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue)

from the edge of the bumper.

WARNING

●If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the estimated courselines are not in alignment, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Page 292: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

292

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Shift the shift position to “R”.

2 Turn the steering wheel so that the esti-mated course lines are within the park-ing space, and back up slowly.

Parking spaceEstimated course lines

3 When the rear position of the vehiclehas entered the parking space, turn thesteering wheel so that the vehicle widthguide lines are within the left and rightdividing lines of the parking space.

Vehicle width guide line

4 Once the vehicle width guide lines andthe parking space lines are parallel,straighten the steering wheel and backup slowly until the vehicle has complete-ly entered the parking space.

5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place,and finish parking.

PARKING

When parking in a space which is in thereverse direction to the space describedin the procedure below, the steering di-rections will be reversed.

Page 293: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

293

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

7

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

3. PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE

SCREEN DESCRIPTION

No. Display Function

Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backedstraight up. The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle

width.

Parking assist guide lines

Show the path of the smallest turn possible behind the ve-hicle. Show the approximate position of the steering wheel

when parking.

Distance guide linesShow distance behind the vehicle. Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from

the edge of the bumper.

Page 294: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

294

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Shift the shift position to “R”.

2 Back up until the parking assist guideline meets the edge of the left-hand di-viding line of the parking space.

Parking assist guide lineParking space dividing line

3 Turn the steering wheel all the way tothe right, and back up slowly.

4 Once the vehicle is parallel with theparking space, straighten the steeringwheel and back up slowly until the vehi-cle has completely entered the parkingspace.

5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place,and finish parking.

PARKING

When parking in a space which is in thereverse direction to the space describedin the procedure below, the steering di-rections will be reversed.

Page 295: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

295

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

7

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

4. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PRECAUTIONS

The image adjustment procedure for theparking assist monitor screen is the same asthe procedure for adjusting the navigationscreen. (P.44)

AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN

The parking assist monitor displays animage of the view from the bumper ofthe rear area of the vehicle.

Screen

Displayed area

Corners of bumper

INFORMATION

●The area displayed on the screen mayvary according to vehicle orientationconditions.

●Objects which are close to either cornerof the bumper or under the bumper can-not be displayed.

●The camera uses a special lens. The dis-tance of the image that appears on thescreen differs from the actual distance.

●Items which are located higher than thecamera may not be displayed on themonitor.

Page 296: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

296

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

THE CAMERA

The camera for the parking assist moni-tor is located as shown in the illustration.

USING THE CAMERA

If the camera lens becomes dirty, it can-not transmit a clear image. If water drop-lets, snow or mud adhere to the lens,rinse with water and wipe with a softcloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, washit with a mild cleanser and rinse.

NOTICE

●The parking assist monitor may not oper-ate properly in the following cases.• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the posi-

tion and mounting angle of the cameramay change.

• As the camera has a water proof con-struction, do not detach, disassemble ormodify it. This may cause incorrectoperation.

• Do not strongly rub the camera lens. Ifthe camera lens is scratched, it cannottransmit a clear image.

• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,window cleaner or glass coat to adhereto the camera. If this happens, wipe it offas soon as possible.

• If the temperature changes rapidly, suchas when hot water is poured on thevehicle in cold weather, the system maynot operate normally.

• When washing the vehicle, do not applyintensive bursts of water to the cameraor camera area. Doing so may result inthe camera malfunctioning.

●Do not expose the camera to strongimpact as this could cause a malfunction.If this happens, have the vehicleinspected by your Lexus dealer as soonas possible.

Page 297: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

297

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

7

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

The distance guide lines and the vehiclewidth guide lines may not actually be paral-lel with the dividing lines of the parkingspace, even when they appear to be so. Besure to check visually.The distances between the vehicle width

guide lines and the left and right dividinglines of the parking space may not be equal,even when they appear to be so. Be sure tocheck visually.The distance guide lines give a distance

guide for flat road surfaces. In any of thefollowing situations, there is a margin oferror between the guide lines on the screenand the actual distance/course on the road.

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE SCREEN AND THE ACTUAL ROAD

WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND THE VEHICLE SLOPES UP SHARPLY

The distance guide lines will appear tobe closer to the vehicle than the actualdistance. Because of this, objects will ap-pear to be farther away than they actual-ly are. In the same way, there will be amargin of error between the guidelinesand the actual distance/course on theroad.

Page 298: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

298

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND THE VEHICLE SLOPES DOWN SHARPLY

The distance guide lines will appear tobe further from the vehicle than the ac-tual distance. Because of this, objectswill appear to be closer than they actual-ly are. In the same way, there will be amargin of error between the guidelinesand the actual distance/course on theroad.

WHEN ANY PART OF THE VEHICLE SAGS

When any part of the vehicle sags due tothe number of passengers or the distri-bution of the load, there is a margin of er-ror between the guide lines on thescreen and the actual distance/courseon the road.

WHEN APPROACHING THREE-DIMENSIONAL OBJECTS

The estimated course lines target a flatsurfaced objects (such as the road). It isnot possible to determine the position ofthree-dimensional objects (such as vehi-cles) using the estimated course linesand distance guide lines. When ap-proaching a three-dimensional objectthat extends outward (such as the flat-bed of a truck), be careful of the follow-ing.

A margin of error

Page 299: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

299

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

7

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Estimated course lines

ESTIMATED COURSE LINES

Visually check the surroundings and thearea behind the vehicle. In the caseshown below, the truck appears to beoutside of the estimated course lines andthe vehicle does not look as if it hits thetruck. However, the rear body of thetruck may actually cross over the esti-mated course lines. In reality if you backup as guided by the estimated courselines, the vehicle may hit the truck.

DISTANCE GUIDE LINES

Visually check the surroundings and thearea behind the vehicle. On the screen,it appears that a truck is parking at pointB. However, in reality if you back up topoint A, you will hit the truck. On thescreen, it appears that A is closest and Cis furthest away. However, in reality, thedistance to A and C is the same, and B isfarther than A and C.

Positions of A, B and C

C

AB

C

AB

Page 300: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

300

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

5. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution,and re-check.If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexusdealer.

IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS

Symptom Likely cause Solution

The image is difficult to see

The vehicle is in a dark area The temperature around

the lens is either high or low The outside temperature is

low There are water droplets on

the camera It is raining or humid Foreign matter (mud etc.) is

adhering to the camera Sunlight or headlights are

shining directly into thecamera

The vehicle is under fluo-rescent lights, sodium lights,mercury lights etc.

Back up while visually check-ing the vehicle’s surroundings.(Use the monitor again onceconditions have been im-proved.)The procedure for adjustingthe picture quality of the park-ing assist monitor is the sameas the procedure for adjustingthe navigation screen.(P.44)

The image is blurry

Dirt or foreign matter (such aswater droplets, snow, mudetc.) is adhering to the cam-era.

Rinse the camera lens withwater and wipe it clean with asoft cloth.Wash with a mild soap if thedirt is stubborn.

The image is out of alignmentThe camera or surroundingarea has received a strong im-pact.

Have the vehicle inspected byyour Lexus dealer.

The guide lines are very farout of alignment

The camera position is out ofalignment.

Have the vehicle inspected byyour Lexus dealer.

The vehicle is tilted (there isa heavy load on the vehicle,tire pressure is low due to atire puncture, etc.)

The vehicle is used on anincline.

If this happens due to thesecauses, it does not indicate amalfunction.Back up while visually check-ing the vehicle’s surroundings.

The estimated course linesmove even though the steer-ing wheel is straight

There is a malfunction in thesignals being output by thesteering sensor.

Have the vehicle inspected byyour Lexus dealer.

Page 301: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

301

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

7

PERIPH

ERA

L MO

NITO

RIN

G SY

STEM

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Guide lines are not displayed The back door is open.

Close the back door. If this does not resolve thesymptom, have the vehicle in-spected by your Lexus dealer.

The estimated course linesare not displayed

The steering wheel hasbeen moved while the 12-volt battery was being rein-stalled.

12-volt battery power is low. The steering sensor has

been reinstalled. There is a malfunction in the

signals being output by thesteering sensor.

Stop the vehicle, and turn thesteering wheel as far as it willgo to the left and right.If this does not resolve thesymptom, have the vehicle in-spected by your Lexus dealer.

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page 302: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

302

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Page 303: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

8

303

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.04 19:41

1. QUICK REFERENCE ........................... 304

2. SOME BASICS ........................................ 305REGISTERING/CONNECTING A

Bluetooth® PHONE.......................................... 306

USING THE PHONE SWITCH/MICROPHONE ................................................. 306

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM...................... 307

ABOUT THE CONTACTS IN THE CONTACT LIST ................................................. 308

WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE ..................................................... 309

3. CALLING ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE..................................................... 310BY FAVORITES LIST .............................................. 311

BY CALL HISTORY ................................................ 311

BY CONTACTS LIST ............................................ 312

BY DIAL PAD ............................................................ 315

BY OFF HOOK SWITCH ................................... 315

4. RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE..................................................... 316

INCOMING CALLS.............................................. 316

5. TALKING ON THE Bluetooth®

PHONE..................................................... 317

INCOMING CALL WAITING ......................... 319

6. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION............................................ 320

RECEIVING A MESSAGE ................................. 321

CHECKING MESSAGES................................. 322

REPLYING TO A MESSAGE (QUICK REPLY)................................................. 323

CALLING THE MESSAGE SENDER ......... 325

1. PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS ....... 327

PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS SCREEN ................................................................. 327

“Sound Settings” SCREEN ................................ 328

“Contact/Call History Settings” SCREEN ................................................................. 329

“Messaging Settings” SCREEN .......................... 341

“Phone Display Settings” SCREEN................. 343

1. TROUBLESHOOTING ........................ 344

1PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

2 SETUP

3 WHAT TO DO IF...

PHONE

Page 304: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

304

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

1. QUICK REFERENCE

The phone top screen can be used to make a phone call. To display the hands-free op-eration screen, press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch and select “Phone”,or the switch on the steering wheel.Several functions are available to operate on each screen that is displayed by selectingthe 4 tabs.

Function Page

Phone operation

Registering/connecting Bluetooth® device 46

Calling on the Bluetooth® phone 310

Receiving on the Bluetooth® phone 316

Talking on the Bluetooth® phone 317

Message function Using the Bluetooth® phone message function 320

Setting up a phonePhone settings 327

Bluetooth® settings 54

Page 305: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

305

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

8

PHO

NE

2. SOME BASICS

The hands-free system enables calls tobe made and received without having totake your hands off the steering wheel.

This system supports Bluetooth®.Bluetooth® is a wireless data systemthat enables cellular phones to be usedwithout being connected by a cable orplaced in a cradle.The operating procedure of the phone isexplained here.

WARNING

● While driving, do not use a cellular phoneor connect the Bluetooth® phone.

● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth®

antennas. People with implantable car-diac pacemakers, cardiac resynchroniza-tion therapy-pacemakers or implantablecardioverter defibrillators should main-tain a reasonable distance betweenthemselves and the Bluetooth® antennas.The radio waves may affect the operationof such devices.

● Before using Bluetooth® devices, usersof any electrical medical device otherthan implantable cardiac pacemakers,cardiac resynchronization therapy-pace-makers or implantable cardioverterdefibrillators should consult the manufac-turer of the device for information aboutits operation under the influence of radiowaves. Radio waves could have unex-pected effects on the operation of suchmedical devices.

NOTICE

● Do not leave your cellular phone in thevehicle. The temperature inside may riseto a level that could damage the phone.

INFORMATION

● If your cellular phone does not supportBluetooth®, this system cannot function.

● In the following conditions, the systemmay not function:• The cellular phone is turned off.• The current position is outside the com-

munication area.• The cellular phone is not connected.• The cellular phone has a low battery.

● When using Bluetooth® audio andhands-free system at the same time, thefollowing problems may occur:

• The Bluetooth® connection may be cut.

• Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth®

audio playback.

Page 306: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

306

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Steering switch

Volume control switchPress the “+” side to increase the volume.Press the “-” side to decrease the volume.

Off hook switch

On hook switch

REGISTERING/CONNECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE

To use the hands-free system for cellularphones, it is necessary to register a cel-lular phone with the system. (P.46)

Bluetooth® PHONE CONDITION DISPLAY

The condition of the Bluetooth® phoneappears on the upper right side of thescreen. (P.16)

USING THE PHONE SWITCH/MICROPHONE

By pressing the phone switch, a call canbe received or ended without takingyour hands off the steering wheel.

Page 307: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

8

PHO

NE

307

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Microphone

The microphone is used when talking onthe phone.

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

Press this switch to operate the voicecommand system.

The voice command system and its list ofcommands can be operated. (P.264)

Page 308: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

308

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

The following data is stored for every regis-tered phone. When another phone is con-nected, the following registered datacannot be read:• Contact data• Call history data• Favorites data• Image data• All phone settings• Message settings

INFORMATION

●The other party’s voice will be heard fromthe front speakers. The audio/visual sys-tem will be muted during phone calls orwhen hands-free voice commands areused.

●Talk alternately with the other party onthe phone. If both parties speak at thesame time, the other party may not hearwhat has been said. (This is not a malfunc-tion.)

●Keep call volume down. Otherwise, theother party’s voice may be audible out-side the vehicle and voice echo mayincrease. When talking on the phone,speak clearly towards the microphone.

●The other party may not hear you clearlywhen:• Driving on an unpaved road. (Making

excessive traffic noise.)• Driving at high speeds.• The roof or windows are open.• The air conditioning vents are pointed

towards the microphone.• The sound of the air conditioning fan is

loud.• There is a negative effect on sound

quality due to the phone and/or networkbeing used.

ABOUT THE CONTACTS IN THE CONTACT LIST

INFORMATION

●When a phone’s registration is deleted,the above-mentioned data is alsodeleted.

Page 309: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

8

PHO

NE

309

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

The following data in the system can be ini-tialized:• Contact data• Call history data• Favorites data• Image data• All phone settings• Message settings

WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE

A lot of personal data is registered whenthe hands-free system is used. Whenselling or disposing of the vehicle, initial-ize the data. (P.71)

INFORMATION

●Once initialized, the data and settings willbe erased. Pay much attention when ini-tializing the data.

Page 310: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

310

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3. CALLING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Phone”.

3 Select the desired tab to call from.

The phone top screen can be displayed bypressing the switch on the steeringwheel.

After a Bluetooth® phone has been reg-istered, a call can be made using thehands-free system. There are severalmethods by which a call can be made, asdescribed below.

How to make a call list Page

By favorites list 311

By call history 311

By contacts list* 312

By dial pad* 315

By e-mail/SMS/MMS 325

By POI call 97

By off hook switch 315

By LEXUS App Suite* 369

By voice command system 270

*: The operation cannot be performed whiledriving.

Page 311: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

8

PHO

NE

311

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.310)

2 Select the “Favorites” tab and select thedesired contact.

3 Select the desired number.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.310)

2 Select the “Call History” tab and select

or the desired contact.

The icons of call type are displayed.

: Missed call

: Incoming call

: Outgoing call

BY FAVORITES LIST

Calls can be made using registered con-tacts which can be selected from a con-tact list. (P.337)

BY CALL HISTORY

Up to 30 of the latest call history items(missed, incoming and outgoing) can beselected from the “Call History” tab.

Page 312: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

312

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

When is selected

3 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

When the desired contact is selected

3 Select the desired number.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.310)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab and select thedesired contact.

3 Select the desired number.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

INFORMATION

●When making a call to the same numbercontinuously, only the most recent call islisted in call history.

●When a phone number registered in thecontact list is received, the name is dis-played.

●Number-withheld calls are also memo-rized in the system.

●International phone calls may not bemade depending on the type of cellularphone you have.

●The list should group together consecu-tive entries with the same phone numberand same call type. For example, two callsfrom John’s mobile would be displayed asfollows: John (2)

●By pressing the switch on the steeringwheel, a call to the latest history item canbe made.

BY CONTACTS LIST

Calls can be made by using contact datawhich is transferred from a registeredcellular phone. (P.313)Up to 2500 contacts (maximum of 4phone numbers and e-mail addressesper contact) can be registered in thecontact list.

Page 313: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

8

PHO

NE

313

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ FOR PBAP COMPATIBLEBluetooth® PHONES

When “Automatic Contact/HistoryTransfer” is set to on (P.329)

1 Select the “Contacts” tab.Contacts are transferred automatically.

2 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

When “Automatic Contact/HistoryTransfer” is set to off (P.329)

1 Select the “Contacts” tab.

2 Select the desired item.

3 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

WHEN THE CONTACT IS EMPTY

No. Function

Select to always transfer all the con-tacts from a connected cellularphone automatically.

Select to transfer all the contactsfrom a connected cellular phoneonly once.

Select to cancel transferring.

Page 314: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

314

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ FOR PBAP INCOMPATIBLE BUTOPP COMPATIBLE Bluetooth®

PHONES

1 Select the “Contacts” tab.

2 Select the desired item.

When “Transfer” is selected

3 Follow the steps in “FOR PBAPINCOMPATIBLE BUT OPPCOMPATIBLE Bluetooth® PHONES”from “STEP 3”. (P.332)

When “Add” is selected

3 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING ANEW CONTACT TO THECONTACTS LIST” from “STEP 2”.(P.334)

No. Function

Select to transfer the contacts fromthe connected cellular phone.

Select to add a new contact manual-ly.

Select to cancel transferring.

INFORMATION

●Manual transfer operation cannot be per-formed while driving.

●If your cellular phone is neither PBAP norOPP compatible, the contacts cannot betransferred.

●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone:• It may be necessary to perform addi-

tional steps on the phone when transfer-ring contact data.

• The registered image in the contact listmay not transfer depending on the typeof Bluetooth® phone connected.

Page 315: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

8

PHO

NE

315

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.310)

2 Select the “Dial Pad” tab and enter thephone number.

3 Select or press the switch onthe steering wheel.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

1 Press the switch on the steeringwheel to display the phone top screen.

2 Press the switch on the steeringwheel to display the “Call History”screen.

3 Press the switch on the steeringwheel to call the latest history item.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

BY DIAL PAD

INFORMATION

●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone being connected, it may be neces-sary to perform additional steps on thephone.

BY OFF HOOK SWITCH

Calls can be made using the latest callhistory item.

Page 316: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

316

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

4. RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE

1 Select or press the switch onthe steering wheel to talk on the phone.

To refuse to receive the call: Select or press the switch on the steeringwheel.To adjust the volume of a received call:Turn the “PWR·VOL” knob, or use the vol-ume control switch on the steering wheel.

INCOMING CALLS

When a call is received, this screen isdisplayed with a sound.

INFORMATION

●During international phone calls, theother party’s name or number may not bedisplayed correctly depending on thetype of cellular phone you have.

●The incoming call display mode can beset. (P.343)

●The ringtone that has been set in the“Sound Settings” screen sounds whenthere is an incoming call. Depending onthe type of Bluetooth® phone, both thenavigation system and Bluetooth® phonemay sound simultaneously when there isan incoming call. (P.328)

Page 317: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

317

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

8

PHO

NE

5. TALKING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE

While talking on the phone, this screen isdisplayed. The operations outlined be-low can be performed on this screen.

No. Function Page

Select to display the dialpad to send tones. 318

Select to mute your voice tothe other party.

Select to change handsetmodes between hands-freeand cellular phone.

Select to adjust your voicevolume that the other partyhears from their speaker.

319

Select to send tones. Thisbutton only appears when anumber that contains a (w)is dialed in hands-freemode.

318

Select to hang up thephone.

Select “+” or “-” to adjustthe volume of the other par-ty’s voice.

Select to start talking withthe other party. 319

INFORMATION

●Changing from hands-free call to cellularphone call is not possible while driving.

●When cellular phone call is changed tohands-free call, the hands-free screen willbe displayed and its functions can beoperated on the screen.

●Changing between cellular phone calland hands-free call can be performed byoperating the cellular phone directly.

●Transferring methods and operations willbe different depending on the type of cel-lular phone you have.

●For the operation of the cellular phone,see the manual that comes with it.

Page 318: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

318

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ BY DIAL PAD

1 Select “0-9”.

2 Enter the desired number.

■ BY SELECTING “Release Tones”

1 Select “Release Tones”.

SENDING TONES

This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.

“Release Tones” appear when a contin-uous tone signal(s) containing a (w) isregistered in the contact list.This operation can be performed whiledriving.

INFORMATION

●A continuous tone signal is a characterstring that consists of numbers and thecharacters p or w. (e.g.056133w0123p#1)

●When the “p” pause tone is used, the tonedata up until the next pause tone will beautomatically sent after 2 seconds haveelapsed. When the “w” pause tone isused, the tone data up until the nextpause tone will be automatically sentafter a user operation is performed.

●Release tones can be used when auto-mated operation of a phone based ser-vice such as an answering machine orbank phone service is desired. A phonenumber with continuous tone signals canbe registered in the contact list.

●Tone data after a “w” pause tone can beoperated on voice command during acall.

Page 319: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

8

PHO

NE

319

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “Transmit Volume”.

2 Select the desired level for the transmitvolume.

3 Select “OK”.

1 Select or press the switch onthe steering wheel to start talking withthe other party.

To refuse to receive the call: Select or press the switch on the steeringwheel.

Each time is selected or the switch on the steering wheel is pressedduring an interrupted call, the party who ison hold will be switched.

TRANSMIT VOLUME SETTING

INFORMATION

●The sound quality of the voice heard fromthe other party’s speaker may be nega-tively impacted.

●To reset the transmit volume, select“Default”.

●“Transmit Volume” is dimmed when muteis on.

INCOMING CALL WAITING

When a call is interrupted by a third par-ty while talking, this screen is displayed.

INFORMATION

●This function may not be availabledepending on the type of cellular phone.

Page 320: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

320

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

6. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Phone”.

3 Select .

The phone top screen can be displayed bypressing the switch on the steeringwheel.

4 Check that the message inbox screen isdisplayed.

: Select to change to phone mode.

Received messages can be forwardedfrom the connected Bluetooth® phone,enabling checking and replying usingthe navigation system.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone connected, received messagesmay not be transferred to the messageinbox.If the phone does not support the mes-sage function, this function cannot beused.

Function Page

Receiving a message 321

Checking messages 322

Replying to a message (quick reply) 323

Calling the message sender 325

Message settings 341

Page 321: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

8

PHO

NE

321

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

RECEIVING A MESSAGE

When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is re-ceived, the incoming message screenpops up with sound and is ready to beoperated on the screen.

No. Function

Select to check the message.

Select to not open the message.

Select to call the message sender.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the cellular phone used forreceiving messages, or its registrationstatus with the navigation system, someinformation may not be displayed.

●The pop up screen is separately availablefor incoming e-mail and SMS/MMS mes-sages under the following conditions:E-mail:• “Incoming E-mail Display” is set to “Full

Screen”. (P.341)• “E-mail Notification Popup” is set to on.

(P.341)SMS/MMS:• “Incoming SMS/MMS Display” is set to

“Full screen”. (P.341)• “SMS/MMS Notification Popup” is set

to on. (P.341)

Page 322: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

322

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the message inbox screen.(P.320)

2 Select the desired message from the list.

3 Check that the message is displayed.

CHECKING MESSAGES

No. Function

Select “Mark Unread” or “MarkRead” to mark mail unread or readon the message inbox screen.This function is available when “Up-date Message Read Status onPhone” is set to on. (P.341)

Select to reply the message.(P.323)

Select to display the previous or nextmessage.

Select to have messages read out.To cancel this function, select “Stop”.When “Automatic Message Read-out” is set to on, messages will be au-tomatically read out. (P.341)

Select to make a call to the sender.

INFORMATION

●Reading a text message is not availablewhile driving.

●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone being connected, it may benecessary to perform additional steps onthe phone.

●Messages are displayed in theappropriate connected Bluetooth®

phone’s registered mail address folder.Select the tab of the desired folder to bedisplayed.

●Only received messages on theconnected Bluetooth® phone can bedisplayed.

●The text of the message is not displayedwhile driving.

●Turn the “PWR·VOL” knob, or use thevolume control switch on the steeringwheel to adjust the message read outvolume.

Page 323: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

8

PHO

NE

323

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the message inbox screen.(P.320)

2 Select the desired message from the list.

3 Select “Quick Msg”.

4 Select the desired message.

5 Select “Send”.

While the message is being sent, a sendingmessage screen is displayed. To cancel sending the message, select

“Cancel”.

6 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

If an error message is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try again.

REPLYING TO A MESSAGE (QUICK REPLY)

15 messages have already been stored.

Page 324: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

324

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ EDITING QUICK REPLY MESSAG-ES

1 Select “Quick Msg”.

2 Select corresponding to the de-sired message to edit.

3 Select “OK” when editing is completed.

This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.

INFORMATION

●To reset the edited quick reply messages,select “Default”.

●“Quick Message 1” (“I am driving andwill arrive in approximately [ETA]minutes.”):This message cannot be edited and willautomatically fill in [ETA] with thenavigation calculated estimated time ofarrival on the confirm message screen.If there are waypoints set, [ETA] to thenext waypoint will be shown.If there is no route currently set in thenavigation system, “Quick Message 1”cannot be selected.

Page 325: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

8

PHO

NE

325

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ CALLING FROM E-MAIL/SMS/MMS MESSAGE DISPLAY

1 Display the message inbox screen.(P.320)

2 Select the desired message.

3 Select .

If there are 2 or more phone numbers,select the desired number.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

■ CALLING FROM A NUMBERWITHIN A MESSAGE

1 Display the message inbox screen.(P.320)

2 Select the desired message.

3 Select the text area.

4 Select the desired number.

Identified phone numbers contained in themessage are displayed.

CALLING THE MESSAGE SENDER

Calls can be made to an e-mail/SMS/MMS message sender’s phone number.This operation can be performed whiledriving.

Calls can be made to a number identi-fied in a message’s text area.This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.

Page 326: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

326

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

5 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

■ CALLING FROM THE INCOMINGMESSAGE SCREEN

P.321

INFORMATION

●A series of numbers may be recognizedas a phone number. Additionally, somephone numbers may not be recognized,such as those for other countries.

Page 327: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

327

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

8

PHO

NE

2. SETUP

1. PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Phone”.

4 Select the item to be set.

PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS SCREEN

No. Information Page

Registering/connecting aphone 55

Sound settings 328

Contact/call history set-tings 329

Messaging settings 341

Phone display settings 343

Page 328: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

328

2. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.310)

2 Select “Settings”.1 Display the “Phone/Message Settings”

screen. (P.327)

2 Select “Sound Settings”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

DISPLAYING THE PHONE/MESSAGE SETTINGS SCREEN IN A DIFFERENT WAY

“Sound Settings” SCREEN

The call and ringtone volume can be ad-justed. A ringtone can be selected.

Page 329: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

329

2. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

8

PHO

NE

1 Display the “Phone/Message Settings”screen. (P.327)

2 Select “Contact/Call HistorySettings”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

No. Function

Select to set the desired ringtone.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the ring-tone volume.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the mes-sage readout volume.

Select to set the desired incomingSMS/MMS tone.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the incom-ing SMS/MMS tone volume.

Select to set the desired incoming e-mail tone.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the incom-ing e-mail tone volume.

Select “-” or “+” to adjust the defaultvolume of the other party’s voice.

Select to reset all setup items.

INFORMATION

● Depending on the type of phone, certainfunctions may not be available.

“Contact/Call History Settings” SCREEN

The contact can be transferred from aBluetooth® phone to the system. Thecontact also can be added, edited anddeleted.The call history can be deleted and con-tact and favorites can be changed.

Page 330: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

330

2. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

*: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®

phones, this function is available when“Automatic Contact/History Transfer” isset to off. (P.329)

No. Function Page

For PBAP compatibleBluetooth® phones, selectto set automatic contact/history transfer on/off.When set to on, the phone’scontact data and history areautomatically transferred.

Select to update contactsfrom the connected phone. 331

Select to sort contacts bythe first name or last namefield.

Select to add contacts tothe favorites list. 337

Select to delete contactsfrom the favorites list. 339

Select to set the transferredcontact image display on/off.

*Select to clear contactsfrom the call history.

*Select to add new contactsto the contact list. 334

*Select to edit contacts inthe contact list. 335

*Select to delete contactsfrom the contact list. 336

Select to reset all setupitems.

INFORMATION

● Depending on the type of phone, certainfunctions may not be available.

● Contact data is managed independentlyfor every registered phone. When onephone is connected, another phone’s reg-istered data cannot be read.

Page 331: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

331

2. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

8

PHO

NE

■ FOR PBAP COMPATIBLEBluetooth® PHONES

1 Select “Update Contacts from Phone”.Contacts are transferred automatically.

2 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

This operation may be unnecessarydepending on the type of cellular phone.Depending on the type of cellular phone,

OBEX authentication may be requiredwhen transferring contact data. Enter“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.

If another Bluetooth® device is connectedwhen transferring contact data, dependingon the phone, the connected Bluetooth®

device may need to be disconnected.

Depending on the type of Bluetooth®

phone being connected, it may be neces-sary to perform additional steps on thephone.

UPDATE CONTACTS FROM PHONE

Operation methods differ betweenPBAP compatible and PBAP incompat-ible but OPP compatible Bluetooth®

phones.If your cellular phone is neither PBAPnor OPP compatible, the contacts can-not be transferred.

Page 332: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

332

2. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ FOR PBAP INCOMPATIBLE BUTOPP COMPATIBLE Bluetooth®

PHONES

1 Select “Update Contacts from Phone”.

2 Select “Replace Contacts” or “AddContacts”.

“Replace Contacts”: Select to transfer thecontact from the connected cellular phoneand replace the current one.“Add Contacts”: Select to transfer the de-sired contact data from the connected cel-lular phone to add to the current one.

3 Transfer the contact data to the systemusing a Bluetooth® phone.

This operation may be unnecessarydepending on the type of cellular phone.Depending on the type of cellular phone,

OBEX authentication may be requiredwhen transferring contact data. Enter“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.To cancel this function, select “Cancel”.

4 Select “Done” when it appears on thescreen.

5 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

This operation cannot be performedwhile driving.

Page 333: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

333

2. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

8

PHO

NE

■ UPDATING THE CONTACTS IN ADIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE “CallHistory” SCREEN)

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.310)

2 Select the “Call History” tab and selecta contact not yet registered in the con-tact list.

3 Select “Update Contact”.

4 Select the desired contact.

5 Select a phone type for the phone num-ber.

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®

phones, this function is available when“Automatic Contact/History Transfer”is set to off. (P.329)

Page 334: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

334

2. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Select “New Contact”.

2 Enter the name and select “OK”.

3 Enter the phone number and select“OK”.

4 Select the phone type for the phonenumber.

5 To add another number to this contact,select “Yes”.

■ REGISTERING A NEW CONTACTIN A DIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE“Call History” SCREEN)

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.310)

2 Select the “Call History” tab and selecta contact not yet registered in the con-tact list.

3 Select “Add to Contacts”.

4 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING ANEW CONTACT TO THECONTACT LIST” from “STEP 2”.(P.334)

REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACT LIST

New contact data can be registered.Up to 4 numbers per person can be reg-istered. For PBAP compatibleBluetooth® phones, this function isavailable when “Automatic Contact/History Transfer” is set to off. (P.329)

Page 335: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

335

2. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

8

PHO

NE

1 Select “Edit Contacts”.

2 Select the desired contact.

3 Select corresponding to the de-sired name or number.

For editing the name

4 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING ANEW CONTACT TO THECONTACT LIST” from “STEP 2”.(P.334)

For editing the number

4 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING ANEW CONTACT TO THECONTACT LIST” from “STEP 3”.(P.334)

EDITING THE CONTACT DATA

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®

phones, this function is available when“Automatic Contact/History Transfer”is set to off. (P.329)

Page 336: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

336

2. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ EDITING THE CONTACT IN A DIF-FERENT WAY (FROM THE “Con-tact Details” SCREEN)

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.310)

2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History”tab or the “Favorites” tab and select thedesired contact.

3 Select “Edit Contact”.

“E-mail Addresses”: Select to display allregistered e-mail addresses for the contact.

4 Follow the steps in “EDITING THECONTACT DATA” from “STEP 4”.(P.335)

1 Select “Delete Contacts”.

2 Select the desired contact and select“Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

DELETING THE CONTACT DATA

For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®

phones, this function is available when“Automatic Contact/History Transfer”is set to off. (P.329)

INFORMATION

● Multiple data can be selected anddeleted at the same time.

Page 337: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

337

2. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

8

PHO

NE

■ DELETING THE CONTACT IN ADIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE“Contact Details” SCREEN)

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.310)

2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History”tab or the “Favorites” tab and select thedesired contact.

3 Select “Delete Contact”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

■ REGISTERING THE CONTACTSIN THE FAVORITES LIST

1 Select “Add Favorite”.

2 Select the desired contact to add to thefavorites list.

Dimmed contacts are already stored as afavorite.

3 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

INFORMATION

● When a Bluetooth® phone is deleted, thecontact data will be deleted at the sametime.

FAVORITES LIST SETTING

Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 num-bers per contact) can be registered inthe favorites list.

Page 338: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

338

2. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

When 15 contacts have already beenregistered to the favorites list

1 When 15 contacts have already beenregistered to the favorites list, a regis-tered contact needs to be replaced. Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears to replace a contact.

2 Select the contact to be replaced.

3 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

Registering contacts in the favorites list ina different way (from the “Contacts”screen)

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.310)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab.

3 Select (grey) at the beginning of thedesired contact list name to be regis-tered in the favorites list.

When selected, (grey) is changed to(yellow), and the contact is registered inthe favorites list.

Page 339: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

339

2. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

8

PHO

NE

Registering contacts in the favorites list ina different way (from the “Contact De-tails” screen)

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.310)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab or the “CallHistory” tab and select the desired con-tact.

3 Select “Add Favorite”.

4 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

■ DELETING THE CONTACTS INTHE FAVORITES LIST

1 Select “Remove Favorite”.

2 Select the desired contacts and select“Remove”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

4 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

Page 340: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

340

2. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Deleting contacts in the favorites list in adifferent way (from the “Contacts”screen)

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.310)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab.

3 Select (yellow) at the beginning of thecontact list name to be deleted from thefavorites list.

When selected, (yellow) is changed to(grey), and the data is deleted from thelist.

Deleting contacts in the favorites list in adifferent way (from the “Contact Details”screen)

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.310)

2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History”tab or the “Favorites” tab and select thedesired contact to delete.

3 Select “Remove Favorite”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

5 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-played when the operation is complete.

Page 341: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

341

2. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

8

PHO

NE

1 Display the “Phone/Message Settings”screen. (P.327)

2 Select “Messaging Settings”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

“Messaging Settings” SCREEN No. Function

Select to set automatic messagetransfer on/off.

Select to set automatic message read-out on/off.

Select to set the SMS/MMS notifica-tion popup on/off.

Select to set the e-mail notificationpopup on/off.

Select to set adding the vehicle signa-ture to outgoing messages on/off.

Select to set updating message readstatus on phone on/off.

Select to change the incoming SMS/MMS display.“Full Screen”: When an SMS/MMSmessage is received, the incomingSMS/MMS display screen is dis-played and can be operated on thescreen.“Drop-Down”: When an SMS/MMSmessage is received, a message is dis-played on the upper side of the screen.

Select to change the incoming e-maildisplay.“Full Screen”: When an e-mail is re-ceived, the incoming e-mail displayscreen is the displayed and can be op-erated on the screen.“Drop-Down”: When an e-mail is re-ceived, a message is displayed on theupper side of the screen.

Select to set display of messaging ac-count names on the inbox tab on/off. When set to on, messaging accountnames used on the cellular phone willbe displayed.

Select to reset all setup items.

Page 342: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

342

2. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the phone top screen.(P.310)

2 Select .

3 Select “Settings”.

INFORMATION

● Depending on the phone, these functionsmay not be available.

DISPLAYING THE “Messaging Settings” SCREEN IN A DIFFERENT WAY

Page 343: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

343

2. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

8

PHO

NE

1 Display the “Phone/Message Settings”screen. (P.327)

2 Select “Phone Display Settings”.

3 Select the desired item to be set.

“Phone Display Settings” SCREEN

No. Function

Select to change the incoming calldisplay.“Full Screen”: When a call is re-ceived, the hands-free screen is dis-played and can be operated on thescreen.“Drop-Down”: A message is dis-played on the upper side of thescreen and can only be operated viathe steering wheel switches.

Select to set display of the contact/history transfer completion messageon/off.

Select to reset all setup items.

INFORMATION

● Depending on the phone, these functionsmay not be available.

Page 344: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

344

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

1. TROUBLESHOOTING

When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth® device

If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth® device, first check thetable below.

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

The hands-free sys-tem or Bluetooth®

device does notwork.

The connected de-vice may not be acompatibleBluetooth® cellularphone.

For a list of specificdevices whichoperation has beenconfirmed on thissystem, check withyour Lexus dealer orthe followingwebsite: http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink

The Bluetooth® ver-sion of the connectedcellular phone maybe older than thespecified version.

Use a cellular phonewith Bluetooth® ver-sion 2.0 or higher(recommended: Ver.3.0 +EDR or higher).

50

Page 345: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

345

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

8

PHO

NE

When registering/connecting a cellular phone

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

A cellular phone can-not be registered.

An incorrect pass-code was entered onthe cellular phone.

Enter the correctpasscode on the cel-lular phone.

The registration op-eration has not beencompleted on thecellular phone side.

Complete the regis-tration operation onthe cellular phone(approve registrationon the phone).

Old registration in-formation remains oneither this system orthe cellular phone.

Delete the existingregistration informa-tion from both thissystem and the cellu-lar phone, then regis-ter the cellular phoneyou wish to connectto this system.

57

A Bluetooth® con-nection cannot bemade.

Another Bluetooth®

device is alreadyconnected.

Manually connectthe cellular phoneyou wish to use to thissystem.

58

Bluetooth® functionis not enabled on thecellular phone.

Enable theBluetooth® functionon the cellular phone.

AutomaticBluetooth® connec-tion on this system isset to off.

Set automaticBluetooth® connec-tion on this system toon when the powerswitch is in ACCES-SORY or ON mode.

63

Page 346: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

346

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

When making/receiving a call

“Unable to dial.Please check yourphone.” message isdisplayed.

Bluetooth® functionis not enabled on thecellular phone.

Enable theBluetooth® functionon the cellular phone.

Old registration in-formation remains oneither this system orthe cellular phone.

Delete the existingregistration informa-tion from both thissystem and the cellu-lar phone, then regis-ter the cellular phoneyou wish to connectto this system.

57

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

A call cannot bemade/received.

Your vehicle is in a“No Service” area.

Move to where “NoService” no longerappears on the dis-play.

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

Page 347: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

347

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

8

PHO

NE

When using the phonebook

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

Phonebook datacannot be trans-ferred manually/au-tomatically.

The profile version ofthe connected cellu-lar phone may not becompatible withtransferring phone-book data.

For a list of specificdevices whichoperation has beenconfirmed on thissystem, check withyour Lexus dealer orthe followingwebsite: http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink

Automatic contacttransfer function onthis system is set tooff.

Set automatic con-tact transfer functionon this system to on.

329

Passcode has notbeen entered on thecellular phone.

Enter the passcodeon the cellular phoneif requested (defaultpasscode: 1234).

Transfer operationon the cellular phonehas not completed.

Complete transferoperation on the cel-lular phone (approvetransfer operation onthe phone).

Phonebook datacannot be edited.

Automatic contacttransfer function onthis system is set toon.

Set automatic con-tact transfer functionon this system to off.

329

Page 348: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

348

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

When using the Bluetooth® message function

In other situations

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

Messages cannot beviewed.

Message transfer isnot enabled on thecellular phone.

Enable messagetransfer on the cellu-lar phone (approvemessage transfer onthe phone).

Automatic transferfunction on this sys-tem is set to off.

Set automatic trans-fer function on thissystem to on.

341

New message notifi-cations are not dis-played.

Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail recep-tion on this system isset to off.

Set notification ofSMS/MMS/E-mailreception on this sys-tem to on.

341

Automatic messagetransfer function isnot enabled on thecellular phone.

Enable automatictransfer function onthe cellular phone.

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

The Bluetooth® con-nection status is dis-played at the top ofthe screen each timethe power switch is inACCESSORY orON mode.

Connection confir-mation display on thissystem is set to on.

To turn off the dis-play, set connectionconfirmation displayon this system to off.

62

Page 349: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

349

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

8

PHO

NE

: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cellular phone.

Even though all con-ceivable measureshave been taken, thesymptom status doesnot change.

The cellular phone isnot close enough tothis system.

Bring the cellularphone closer to thissystem.

Radio interferencehas occurred.

Turn off Wi-Fi® de-vices or other devic-es that may emitradio waves.

The cellular phone isthe most likely causeof the symptom.

Turn the cellularphone off, removeand reinstall the bat-tery pack, and thenrestart the cellularphone.

Enable the cellularphone’s Bluetooth®

connection.

Disable the Wi-Fi®

connection of thecellular phone.

Stop the cellularphone’s security soft-ware and close all ap-plications.

Before using an ap-plication installed onthe cellular phone,carefully check itssource and how itsoperation might af-fect this system.

Symptom Likely cause Solution

Page

Cellular phone

This system

Page 350: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

350

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Page 351: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

9

351

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:44

1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW............... 352

2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE.................................................... 353

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION ............. 355

PREPARATION BEFORE USING LEXUS App Suite................................................ 356

3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM ................... 358

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION ............. 359

4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM ................................... 361

1. LEXUS App Suite..................................... 362USING LEXUS App Suite.................................. 362

LINKING LEXUS App Suite AND NAVIGATION LOCAL FUNCTION...... 367

App Suite KEYBOARD OPERATION........ 370

2. Destination Assist..................................... 372

MAKE A CALL WITH Destination Assist .... 372

3. eDestination............................................... 374

DOWNLOADING eDestinations .................. 374

SEARCHING eDestinations .............................. 376

DISPLAYING eDestination ICONS .............. 377

4. Lexus Insider .............................................. 378

NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION.............. 378

VIEWING AND PLAYING RECEIVED Lexus Insider MESSAGES............................... 379

1. LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS.............. 382

SCREEN FOR LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS.............................................................. 383

1LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE-OVERVIEW

2LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

3 SETUP

LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE

Page 352: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

352

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE-OVERVIEW

1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

The functions included in Lexus Enform are classified into the following three types.Type A: Function achieved by using a cellular phoneType B: Function achieved by using an embedded cellular device in the vehicle

(DCM: Data Communication Module) and the navigation systemType C: Function achieved by using DCM

Each function is available in the following areas:• LEXUS App Suite is available in the contiguous United States, D.C. and Alaska.• Destination Assist and eDestination are available in the contiguous United States, D.C.

and limited areas of Alaska for vehicle that contain map data.• Lexus Insider is available in the contiguous United States, D.C. and Alaska.• Safety Connect includes four features:

Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle Location andEnhanced Roadside Assistance are available in the contiguous United States, D.C.and Alaska.

Lexus Enform is a feature that includes LEXUS App Suite, Destination Assist, eDesti-nation, Lexus Insider, and Safety Connect.

Function Type

LEXUS App Suite Type A

Destination Assist Type B

eDestination Type B

Lexus Insider Type B

Safety Connect Type C

INFORMATION

● The actual service availability is dependent on the cellular network condition.

Page 353: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

353

1. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE-OVERVIEW

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

, SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT A

ND

APP SU

ITE

2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE

The LEXUS App Suite service requires a compatible cellular phone with data connec-tion.LEXUS App Suite is a service that enables downloadable applications to be displayedon and operated from the navigation screen. Before LEXUS App Suite can be used, afew actions need to be performed first. (P.356)

Page 354: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

354

1. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE-OVERVIEW

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

*: For known compatible phones, refer to http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink.

No. Name Function

Content provider Provides content to the navigation system via a cellular phone.

Application server Provides downloadable applications to the navigation systemvia a cellular phone.

Cellular phone*

Utilizing the LEXUS Enform application on your phone, com-munication is relayed between the navigation system, the appli-cation server and the content provider if you have a dataconnection.

ApplicationsDownloaded App Suite applications provide access to audiovi-sual content from a content provider, when connected with acompatible phone with a data connection.

Navigation system

Content received, via a cellular phone, from the content provid-er’s server are displayed on the navigation screen. The naviga-tion system is equipped with an application player to runapplications.

Page 355: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

355

1. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE-OVERVIEW

9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

, SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT A

ND

APP SU

ITE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

User registration is required to start usingthe App Suite service. (P.357)App Suite does not require an activation

fee or monthly recurring fees.Services requiring a separate contract can

also be used.**: For details, refer to

http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987.

LEXUS App Suite is available in the contig-uous United States, D.C. and Alaska.

The following personal data can be deletedfrom the navigation system. and returned totheir default settings:• Downloaded Application• Downloaded Application Content

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION

SUBSCRIPTION

AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE

INFORMATION

● When using LEXUS App Suite, depend-ing on the details of your cellular phonecontract, data usage fees may apply.Confirm data usage fees before using thisservice.

● In this section, the required actions toactivate applications, connect a cellularphone to the navigation system and regis-tration steps for LEXUS App Suite areexplained. For details regarding LEXUSApp Suite operations and each of theapplications, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

● The actual service availability is depen-dent on the cellular network condition.

INITIALIZING PERSONAL DATA

The personal data used in applicationscan be removed from the navigationsystem. (P.71)

INFORMATION

● Once initialized, data will be erased fromthe navigation system. Pay close attentionwhen initializing the data.

Page 356: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

356

1. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE-OVERVIEW

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Perform the following actions:

In order to use LEXUS App Suite, the fol-lowing actions must first be performed:Lexus Enform user registration with service

contract (P.356)Download the LEXUS Enform application

onto your cellular phone, and login to theapplication. (P.357)

Register a Bluetooth® phone with thehands-free system. (P.46)Download App Suite Applications to navi-

gation system. (P.357)

1 Perform user registration at http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

PREPARATION BEFORE USING LEXUS App Suite

SETUP REQUIRED TO USE LEXUS App Suite

1 Lexus Enform user registration

2 Download the LEXUS Enform appli-cation to your cellular phone.

3 Register and connect the cellularphone to the navigation system.

4 Download App Suite Applications tonavigation system.

USER REGISTRATION

Page 357: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

357

1. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE-OVERVIEW

9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

, SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT A

ND

APP SU

ITE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Download the LEXUS Enform applica-tion to your cellular phone.

2 Run the LEXUS Enform application onyour cellular phone.

3 Enter the information required into theLEXUS Enform application. Login tothe application.

1 Before App Suite Applications can bedownloaded, the other actions onP.356 need to be performed first.

2 Once your phone is running the LexusEnform Application, with an accountlogged in, and connected to the naviga-tion system, an on-screen pop-up willdisplay offering to begin the App Suiteapplication download. See P.363 step2 for more information once downloadhas started.

DOWNLOADING AND LOGGING INTO THE LEXUS ENFORM APPLICATION

INFORMATION

● Applications can only be used when theLEXUS Enform application has beendownloaded to your cellular phone andthe application is running.

● LEXUS App Suite operational proce-dures can also be confirmed by visitinghttp://www.lexus.com/enform/.

● In order to use applications, it is neces-sary to run the LEXUS App Suite appli-cation on your cellular phone.

●If an iPhone is connected via Bluetooth®

and USB at the same time, system opera-tion may become unstable. For knownphone compatibility information, refer tohttp://www.lexus.com/enform/.

●If a LEXUS App Suite application is usedwhile iPod audio/video is being playedback, system operation may becomeunstable.

DOWNLOADING App Suite APPLICATIONS TO NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Page 358: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

358

1. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE-OVERVIEW

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Of the functions included in Lexus Enform with Safety Connect, Destination Assist,eDestination, and Lexus Insider are achieved through the cooperation of the DCMand navigation system.These are subscription-based telematics services that use Global Positioning System(GPS) data, embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security as well asconvenience features to subscribers.The services are supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24hours per day, 7 days per week. The services are available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equippedvehicles.

No. Name

Lexus’ designated response center

TEL, GPS antenna

DCM

Navigation system

Page 359: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

359

1. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE-OVERVIEW

9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

, SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT A

ND

APP SU

ITE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

After you have signed the Telematics Sub-scription Service Agreement and areenrolled, you can begin receiving services.A variety of subscription terms is availablefor purchase. Contact your Lexus dealer,call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987), or select “Destination Assist” inyour vehicle for further subscription details.(P.372)

Destination Assist and eDestination areavailable in the contiguous United States,D.C. and limited areas of Alaska for vehi-cles that contain map data.Lexus Insider is available in the contiguous

United States, D.C. and Alaska.

Enrollment in Lexus Enform with SafetyConnect (via your dealership) is requiredto activate all services.

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION

SUBSCRIPTION

AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE(S)

ACTIVATION OF SERVICE(S)

Certification for Lexus Enform withSafety Connect

FCC WARNING:This equipment complies with FCCradiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment and meetsthe FCC radio frequency (RF)Exposure Guidelines in Supplement Cto OET65. This equipment should beinstalled and operated keeping theradiator at least 20cm or more awayfrom person’s body (excludingextremities: hands, wrists, feet andankles).

FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101FCC ID: XOECDMRF101BFCC ID: N7NGTM2

Page 360: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

360

1. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE-OVERVIEW

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

INFORMATION

● Exposure to radio frequency signals:The Lexus Enform with Safety Connectsystem installed in your vehicle is a lowpower radio transmitter and receiver. Thesystem receives and also sends out radiofrequency (RF) signals.

● In August 1996, the Federal Communi-cations Commission (FCC) adopted RFexposure guidelines with safety levels formobile wireless phones. Those guidelinesare consistent with the safety standardspreviously set by both U.S. and interna-tional standards bodies.• ANSI (American National Standards

Institute) C95.1 [1992]• NCRP (National Council on Radiation

Protection and Measurement) Report86 [1986]

• ICNIRP (International Commission onNon-Ionizing Radiation Protection)[1996]

● Those standards were based on compre-hensive and periodic evaluations of therelevant scientific literature. Over 120scientists, engineers, and physicians fromuniversities, government health agen-cies, and industry reviewed the availablebody of research to develop the ANSIStandard (C95.1).

● The design of Lexus Enform with SafetyConnect complies with the FCC guide-lines in addition to those standards.

INFORMATION

● Available beginning Fall 2009 on selectLexus models. Contact with the LexusEnform with Safety Connect responsecenter is dependent upon the telematicsdevice being in operative condition, cel-lular connection availability, navigationmap data, and GPS satellite signal recep-tion, which can limit the ability to reachthe response center or receive support.Enrollment and Telematics SubscriptionService Agreement required. A variety ofsubscription terms is available; chargesvary by subscription term selected.

● The Lexus Enform with Safety Connectresponse center will offer support in mul-tiple languages.

● Select Lexus Enform with Safety Con-nect-subscribed vehicles are capable ofcommunicating vehicle information, trig-gering owner reminder notifications.Owners who do not wish to have theirvehicle transmit this information can optout of the service at the time of enroll-ment or by calling 1-800-255-3987 andfollow the prompt for Lexus Enform withSafety Connect.

● For further details about the service, con-tact your Lexus dealer.

● Lexus Enform with Safety Connect ser-vices are not subject to section 255 ofthe Telecommunications Act and thedevice is not TTY compatible.

Page 361: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

361

1. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE-OVERVIEW

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

, SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT A

ND

APP SU

ITE

4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM

Of the functions included in Lexus Enform with Safety Connect, Safety Connect isachieved through the operation of the DCM.For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.

Page 362: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

362

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

1. LEXUS App Suite

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “LEXUS App Suite”.

3 Select the desired application button.USING LEXUS App Suite

LEXUS App Suite is a service that en-ables the usable contents of a cellularphone to be displayed on and operatedfrom the navigation screen. BeforeLEXUS App Suite can be used, a fewactions need to be performed first.(P.356)For details about the function and ser-vice of each application, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

No. Function Page

Select to activate an appli-cation.

Select to update all the ap-plications. 363

Select to reorder the appli-cations. 365

Displays the number of newnotifications for the appli-cation

Page 363: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

363

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

, SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT A

ND

APP SU

ITE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

■ DOWNLOADING THE UPDATEDDATA

1 Select “Update”.

2 Check that downloading is started.

“Download in Background”: Select to op-erate other functions while downloading.“Cancel”: Select to cancel updating.

3 Check that downloading is completed.

From the “Update” screen

From the other screen

UPDATING AN APPLICATION

When LEXUS App Suite is activated, anapplication may need to be updated. Byupdating, an application can be updatedto the latest version. To update the appli-cation, it is necessary to download theupdated data and install it.

If an update is available, “Update” canbe selected.

Page 364: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

364

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

Application download time will vary basedon speed of cellular network, and will takesome time.Application download can be resumed

after ignition off and back on.Future Mandatory updates will display an

on-screen pop-up when available.

■ INSTALLING THE UPDATEDDATA

1 Select “Install”.

2 Select “Continue”.

“Later”: Select to postpone the installationof the updated data and go back to the pre-vious screen.

No. Function

Select to install later. When thisscreen button is selected, the screenwill return to the last displayedscreen. To install the updated data:P.364

Select to display detailed updatedata information.

Select to install the updated data.Follow the steps “INSTALLINGTHE UPDATED DATA” from“STEP 2”. (P.364)

After the downloading is complete,“Update” will be changed to “Install”.

Page 365: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

365

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

, SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT A

ND

APP SU

ITE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3 Check that installing is started.

“Install in Background”: Select to operateother function while installing.

4 Select “OK” after the installing is com-plete.

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen.(P.362)

2 Select “Reorder”.

3 Select the desired application to bemoved.

4 Select “<<” or “>>” to move the applica-tion, and select “OK”.

INFORMATION

● LEXUS App Suite function cannot beoperated while installing.

REORDERING THE APPLICATIONS

Order of the applications can bechanged.

Page 366: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

366

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

IF A MESSAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN

When problems occur with starting up the application player, a message will appearon the screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggestedcorrective action.

Message Display conditions Corrective action

“This feature is unavailableduring an emergency call.”

Safety Connect is being oper-ated.

After Safety Connect is fin-ished, perform the operationagain.

“This feature is unavailablewhile transferring contacts.”

Contacts are being trans-ferred manually from thephonebook.

When the transfer of contactsis complete, perform the op-eration.

“Unable to connect to aBluetooth* phone. For trou-bleshooting assistance,please visit the Lexus websiteor contact your dealer.”

The cellular phone cannot beconnected.

Refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ toconfirm if the phone is com-patible or not.

“This feature is unavailableduring a handsfree call.”

A hands-free call is inprogress.

After the hands-free call is fin-ished, perform the operation.

“To use the services, an activeapplication needs to be run-ning on your phone. For moreinformation, please visitlexus.com.”

The LEXUS App Suite appli-cation cannot be connectedto Bluetooth® SPP.

Refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ toconfirm if the phone isBluetooth® SPP compatibleor not, and then activate theLEXUS App Suite applica-tion.

“Communication error.Please try again.”

Communication was discon-nected.

After a few moments, retry theoperation.Note: This may be caused bypoor connectivity with the cel-lular network or the contentprovider.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Page 367: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

367

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

, SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT A

ND

APP SU

ITE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Nav”.

3 Select “Dest.”.

4 Select “Web Search”.

5 Check that the “Web Search” screen isdisplayed.

LINKING LEXUS App Suite AND NAVIGATION LOCAL FUNCTION

The navigation can set a destination andmake a hands-free call via LEXUS AppSuite. For details about the function andservice of each application, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

Page 368: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

368

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Web Search” screen.(P.367)

2 Select the desired application button tosearch.

3 Enter a search term, and select “Go”.

4 Select “Map”.

5 Select “Go to ”.

6 Select “OK” to start guidance.

SETTING A DESTINATION USING LEXUS App Suite

Locations that were searched usingLEXUS App Suite can be set as a desti-nation.

For the operation of the route guidancescreen and the function of each screenbutton: P.121These application screens are shown for

illustrative purposes, and the actualscreens may vary based on application.

Page 369: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

369

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

, SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT A

ND

APP SU

ITE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “Web Search” screen.(P.367)

2 Select the desired application button tosearch.

3 Enter a search term, and select “Go”.

4 Select “Call”.

5 Select “Yes”.

“Cancel”: Select to cancel making a phonecall.

6 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-played.

MAKING A PHONE CALL USING LEXUS App Suite

Phone calls can be made to locationswhich were searched using LEXUSApp Suite.

For phone operation and the function ofeach screen button: P.317These application screens are shown for

illustrative purposes, and the actualscreens may vary based on application.

Page 370: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

370

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen.(P.362)

2 Select the desired application button.

3 Select an input field on the screen.

4 Enter a search term, and then select“OK”.

5 Entering characters will be reflected onthe character entering space.

App Suite KEYBOARD OPERATION

Information can be entered into an ap-plication by the software keyboard orvoice recognition function. For detailsabout the function and service of eachapplication, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

The keyboard layout can be changed.(P.64)

USING THE SOFTWARE KEYBOARD

For details on operating the keyboard:P.40These application screens are shown for

illustrative purposes, and the actualscreens will vary by application.

Page 371: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

371

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

, SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT A

ND

APP SU

ITE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen.(P.362)

2 Select the desired application button.

3 Press the talk switch on the steeringwheel once the application screen is dis-played. (P.264)

4 System will prompt for user input.

End of user’s speech will be detected auto-matically, and the system will prompt forany additional information if needed.

5 Search results will be displayed on thescreen.

ENTERING A KEYWORD USING THE VOICE RECOGNITION FUNCTION

Alternatively, the application can beopened by the launch Lexus App SuiteVoice Command. (P.267)These application screens are shown for

illustrative purposes, and the actualscreens will vary by application.

Page 372: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

372

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

2. Destination Assist

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Nav”.

3 Select “Dest.”.

4 Select “Destination Assist”.

5 When an agent comes on the line, tellthe agent the address, business name,or the type of POI or service.

To adjust the volume of a received call: Usethe volume control switch on the steeringwheel.To hang up the phone, select “Disconnect”

or press the switch on the steeringwheel.

Destination Assist provides you with liveassistance for finding destinations via theLexus Enform with Safety Connect re-sponse center. You can request either aspecific business, address, or ask forhelp locating your desired destinationby category, such as restaurants, gasstations, shopping centers or otherPoints of Interest (POI).After you tell the agent your choice ofdestination, its coordinates are sentwirelessly to your vehicle’s navigationsystem.

MAKE A CALL WITH Destination Assist

Page 373: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

373

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

, SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT A

ND

APP SU

ITE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

6 After the agent helps you determineyour location of choice, this screen isdisplayed. Select the button of thescreen for the appropriate action.

“Mark”: Select to mark the POI on themap screen.“Enter ”: Select to set as a destination.“Detail”: Select to display the detailed in-formation.

If is selected, the registered phonenumber can be called.

Page 374: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

374

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3. eDestination

Locations can be organized into up to 20personalized folders.

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Nav”.

3 Select “Dest.”.

With the eDestination feature, you cango online, via the Lexus.com owner’sWeb site, to select and organize desti-nations of your choice and then wire-lessly send them to your vehicle’snavigation system. Up to 200 locationscan be stored online and accessed orupdated at any time.

INFORMATION

● You must first go online atwww.lexus.com/drivers/ to view theOwners site where you will need to regis-ter and log in. After this, personalizedfolders that contain the locations to besent to your vehicle can be created. (SeeLexus Enform with Safety ConnectGuide for more information.)

DOWNLOADING eDestinations

After updating eDestination folders on-line, the information to update the data inthe vehicle will be needed to download.

Page 375: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

375

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

, SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT A

ND

APP SU

ITE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

4 Select “Point of Interest”.

5 Select “eDestination”.

6 Select “Download”.

7 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

8 Check that downloading is started.

Most recent online eDestination data willbe loaded to the navigation system.

Page 376: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

376

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Nav”.

3 Select “Dest.”.

4 Select “Point of Interest”.

5 Select “eDestination”.

6 Select the desired eDestination catego-ry.

SEARCHING eDestinations

Page 377: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

377

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

, SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT A

ND

APP SU

ITE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

7 Select the desired location.

8 Select the desired appropriate action.

1 Select “Options”.

2 Select “Map Information”.

3 Select “eDestination”.

The “eDestination” indicator illuminates.

“Mark”: Select to mark the POI on themap screen.“Go”: Select to set the POI as a destina-tion with route directions.

If is selected, the registered phonenumber can be called.

DISPLAYING eDestination ICONS

Page 378: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

378

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

4. Lexus Insider

1 When the new message notification ap-pears, any of the following options canbe selected.

“Listen Now”: Select to play newly receivedLexus Insider article(s).“Listen Later”: Select to remove notifica-tion screen without playing articles. Notifi-cation will be displayed again when thepower switch is turned to ACCESSORY orON mode.

Lexus Insider is an optional service thatcan send audio messages, or articles, toparticipating owners’ vehicles via thenavigation system. Potential LexusInsider subjects might include, for exam-ple, Lexus vehicle technology tips, up-dates on regional Lexus events, or audioexcerpts from Lexus Magazine articles.

NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION

When the vehicle is first powered on anda new Lexus Insider article is available, anotification will appear on the navigationscreen.The notice will appear for onlyapproximately 6 seconds unless one ofthe options listed is selected.

Page 379: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

379

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

, SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT A

ND

APP SU

ITE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Info”.

3 Select “Lexus Insider”.

4 Select the desired article title.

“Read All”: Select to listen to all storedLexus Insider broadcasts.To disrupt the audio read of Lexus Insider,

press the “MODE” switch on the steeringwheel, or press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA”button on the audio system.

VIEWING AND PLAYING RECEIVED Lexus Insider MESSAGES

Page 380: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

380

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “LEXUS Insider” screen.(P.379)

2 Select the desired article.

3 Select “Next” or “Previous” to listen toanother article.

The “ ” or “ ” switch on the steering wheelcan be used to move to the previous or nextarticle.To stop listening to the broadcast, select

“Stop” or press the “PWR·VOL” knob onthe audio system.

MESSAGE ICONS

Icons appear at the left of the LexusInsider story titles and indicate as shownin below.

Icon Article

Unread article

Previously read article

Unread article withdownloadable Point ofInterest (POI)

Previously read articlewith downloadable Pointof Interest (POI)

LISTENING TO ANOTHER ARTICLE

Page 381: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

381

2. LEXUS ENFORM, SAFETY CONNECT AND APP SUITE OPERATION

9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

, SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT A

ND

APP SU

ITE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “LEXUS Insider” screen.(P.379)

2 Select the desired article.

3 Select “Enter ”.

If a POI is contained, “Enter ” can beselected to download a POI to the naviga-tion system.

4 Select “Go” to set the POI as a destina-tion with route directions.

1 Display the “LEXUS Insider” screen.(P.379)

2 Select “Delete”.

3 Select the item to be deleted and select“Delete”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmationscreen appears.

DOWNLOADING A POI

Some Lexus Insider stories will contain adownloadable POI relevant to the con-tent.

DELETING Lexus Insider ARTICLE

Page 382: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

382

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

3. SETUP

1. LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on theRemote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “LEXUS App Suite”.

4 Select the items to be set.

Settings are available for LEXUS AppSuite.

Page 383: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

383

3. SETUP

9

LEXU

S ENFO

RM

, SAFETY

CO

NN

ECT A

ND

APP SU

ITE

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “LEXUS App SuiteSettings” screen. (P.382)

2 Select the desired level by selecting theappropriate number.

SCREEN FOR LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS

No. Information Page

Select to set the voice guid-ance volume. 383

Select to set the pop up re-minder for cellular phonedata usage.

384

Select to set Lexus Insidersettings. 384

Select to reset all setupitems.

VOICE VOLUME SETTINGS

The voice guidance volume can be ad-justed.

Page 384: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

384

3. SETUP

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 11:11

1 Display the “LEXUS App SuiteSettings” screen. (P.382)

2 Select “Phone Data Plan Pop-Up”.

3 Check the desired function to be oper-ated.

1 Display the “LEXUS App SuiteSettings” screen. (P.382)

2 Select “LEXUS Insider”.

3 Select the items to be set.

PHONE DATA PLAN POP-UP SETTINGS

The phone data plan pop-up can be setwhen a paid application is downloaded.

Lexus Insider SETTINGS

Lexus Insider settings, notification, andopt in or out of article receipt can bechanged.

No. Function

Select to set the receiving of Lexus In-sider articles yes/no.

Select to set the new message notifi-cation on/off.

Select to reset all setup items.

Page 385: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

385

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.04 19:41

INDEX

Page 386: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

386

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:44

A

AM/FM radio ............................................................ 179Available HD Radio™ technology...............189Caching a radio program ................................185Overview ................................................................ 179Presetting a station .............................................183Radio broadcast data system .........................186Selecting a station from the list ......................183Traffic announcement (FM radio) ............... 188Troubleshooting guide....................................... 191Using HD Radio™ technology..................... 188

Audio settings .......................................................... 240Audio settings screen........................................ 241

Audio/visual remote controls ........................... 238Audio/visual system ................................................ 167AUX..............................................................................232

Overview ...............................................................232

B

Basic function....................................................... 10, 33Basic information before operation....................34Basic operation ................................................ 82, 168Bluetooth® audio ....................................................226

Connecting a Bluetooth® device .............. 230Listening to Bluetooth® audio ..................... 230Overview ...............................................................226

Bluetooth® phone message function ............ 320Calling the message sender ......................... 325Checking messages..........................................322Receiving a message .........................................321Replying to a message (Quick reply) ....... 323

Bluetooth® settings...................................................46

C

Calling on the Bluetooth® phone ..................... 310By call history ..........................................................311By contacts list...................................................... 312By dial pad.............................................................. 315By favorites list........................................................311By off hook switch ............................................... 315

Casual speech recognization ............................ 272CD.................................................................................. 201

Overview................................................................ 201Playing an audio CD.........................................205Playing an MP3/WMA/AAC disc............206

Command list ........................................................... 274

D

Data services settings............................................284Setting download methods ............................284

Destination Assist ................................................... 372Make a call with Destination Assist ............ 372

Destination search................................................... 105Destination search screen.................................... 105Detailed navigation settings ..................................151

Screens for navigation settings ..................... 152DVD..............................................................................207

DVD options ...........................................................211Overview...............................................................207

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Page 387: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

387

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:44

E

eDestination.............................................................. 374Displaying eDestination icons .......................377Downloading eDestinations.......................... 374Searching eDestinations................................. 376

Editing route ...............................................................133Adding destinations............................................134Deleting destinations......................................... 135Detour setting .......................................................137Reordering destinations .................................. 135Selecting route type............................................136Setting route preferences ................................136Starting from adjacent road ........................... 138

Entering letters and numbers/ list screen operation .................................................................. 40Entering letters and numbers .......................... 40List screen..................................................................41

Estimated course line display mode .................291Parking ................................................................... 292Screen description ..............................................291

F

Function index............................................................. 30Functional overview............................................... 352

G

General settings......................................................... 64General settings screen..................................... 65

GPS (Global Positioning System).................... 160Limitations of the navigation system ........... 160

H

Home screen................................................................. 14Status display............................................................ 16

Home screen operation ......................................... 38How to use the Remote Touch.............................36

I

Information..................................................................281Information display ................................................ 282“Information” screen .................................................20Initial screen..................................................................34Internet radio............................................................ 200

Listening to internet radio.............................. 200iPod ................................................................................ 219

iPod audio..............................................................224iPod video..............................................................225Overview ................................................................ 219

Page 388: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

388

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:44

L

LEXUS App Suite ...................................................362App Suite keyword operation...................... 370Linking LEXUS App Suite and

navigation local function.............................367Using LEXUS App Suite.................................362

LEXUS App Suite settings ................................. 382Screen for LEXUS App Suite settings ..... 383

Lexus enform, safety connect and App Suite ................................................................351

Lexus enform, safety connect and App Suite operation..........................................362

Lexus enform, safety connect and App Suite-overview ......................................... 352

Lexus Insider............................................................. 378New message notification ............................. 378Viewing and playing received

Lexus Insider messages ..............................379Lexus parking assist monitor ............................. 286

Driving precautions .......................................... 286Screen display.....................................................288Using the system................................................ 289

Lexus parking assist monitor precautions.... 295Area displayed on screen.............................. 295Differences between the screen and the

actual road........................................................297The camera ...........................................................296When approaching three-dimensional

objects............................................................... 298

M

Map database version and covered area...... 163About the map data ........................................... 164Map information.................................................. 163

Map screen information..........................................93Displaying information about the icon

where the cursor is set ................................... 97Displaying map information..............................93Standard map icons .............................................99

Map screen operation .............................................85Adjusting location in small increments ........ 92Current position display.....................................85Map scale .................................................................86Orientation of the map ...................................... 88Screen scroll operation ....................................... 91Switching the map mode ...................................89

Media operation....................................................... 201Memory points .......................................................... 139Memory points settings ......................................... 139

Deleting previous destinations...................... 150Setting up address book .................................. 144Setting up areas to avoid...................................147Setting up home................................................... 140Setting up preset destinations ....................... 142

“Menu” screen...............................................................12

Page 389: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

389

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:44

N

Navigation operation ............................................... 22Navigation system.......................................................81

O

Operating information ......................................... 249DVD player and disc..........................................251Error messages.....................................................261File information ................................................... 257iPod.......................................................................... 256Radio ....................................................................... 249Terms ...................................................................... 259

Operation flow: Guiding the route .................... 26Other settings ............................................................. 64

P

Parking assist guide line display mode .......... 293Parking ................................................................... 294Screen description ............................................ 293

Peripheral monitoring system ...........................285Phone...........................................................................303Phone operation (Hands-free system for

cellular phones) ..................................................304Phone/message settings ..................................... 327

“Contact/Call History Settings” screen ................................................................ 329

“Messaging Settings” screen ..........................341“Phone Display Settings” screen................. 343Phone/message settings screen ................. 327“Sound Settings” screen..................................328

Q

Quick guide.....................................................................9Quick reference ........................... 18, 82, 168, 304

Map screen..............................................................82Navigation options screen ............................... 84

R

Radio operation ........................................................ 179Receiving doppler weather information....... 282

Displaying doppler weather information ...................................................... 282

Receiving on the Bluetooth® phone................316Incoming calls .......................................................316

Registering home .......................................................22Registering preset destinations............................24Registering/connecting Bluetooth®

device .........................................................................46Certification.............................................................52Profiles ...................................................................... 50Registering a Bluetooth® audio player

for the first time................................................. 48Registering a Bluetooth® phone

for the first time..................................................46Remote Touch .............................................................. 10Route guidance ......................................................... 125Route guidance screen.......................................... 125

During freeway driving .....................................128Route overview .................................................... 127Screen for route guidance............................... 125Turn list screen .....................................................130Turn-by-turn arrow screen............................... 131When approaching intersection...................130

Page 390: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

390

ALPHABETICAL INDEX

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:44

S

Screen adjustment .....................................................44Search operation...................................................... 107

Destination search by destination assist ..... 116Searching by address ......................................... 110Searching by address book...............................117Searching by coordinates................................120Searching by emergency ...................................117Searching by intersection and freeway....... 118Searching by map................................................. 119Searching by point of interest ........................... 111Searching from previous destinations ......... 116Selecting search area ....................................... 108Setting home as destination ............................109Setting preset destinations as

destination .........................................................109Setting Bluetooth® details......................................54

“Bluetooth* Setup” screen................................ 55Connecting a Bluetooth® device ................. 58Deleting a Bluetooth® device .........................57Editing the Bluetooth® device

information ......................................................... 60Registering a Bluetooth® device ...................56“System Settings” screen....................................62

Setting home as the destination .......................... 28Setup.............................................151, 240, 327, 382“Setup” screen ..............................................................18

Some basics.................................................... 170, 305About the contacts in the contact list ....... 308Audio screen adjustment..................................176Disc slot ....................................................................172Registering/connecting a Bluetooth®

phone .................................................................306Selecting an audio source ................................. 171Sound settings .......................................................174Turning the system on and off ........................ 170USB/AUX port ....................................................173Using the phone switch/microphone........306Voice command system........................178, 307When selling or disposing of the

vehicle................................................................309Starting route guidance........................................... 121

Pausing guidance................................................ 124Starting route guidance...................................... 121

Steering switches ....................................................238

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Page 391: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

391

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:44

T

Talking on the Bluetooth® phone......................317Incoming call waiting..........................................319

Things you should know.......................................300If you notice any symptoms ...........................300

Tips for operating the audio/visual system..................................................................... 249

Tips for the navigation system ............................ 160Traffic information ................................................... 100

Displaying traffic information on the map ........................................................ 103

Traffic settings ............................................................157Auto avoid traffic................................................. 159Screen for traffic settings................................. 158

Troubleshooting ...................................................... 344Type A: Function achieved by using a

cellular phone......................................................353Before using the function ...............................355Preparation before using

LEXUS App Suite ........................................356Type B: Function achieved by using DCM

and the navigation system..............................358Before using the function ...............................359

Type C: Function achieved by using DCM ...361Typical voice guidance prompts ........................132

U

USB memory ..............................................................214Overview ................................................................214USB audio.............................................................. 218

V

Vehicle settings ...........................................................74Maintenance ...........................................................75

Voice command system........................... 263, 264Expanded voice commands ........................... 271Using the voice command system ..............264Voice command system operation.............265

Voice command system operation..................264Voice settings............................................................... 72

Voice settings screen ..........................................73VTR .............................................................................. 235

Overview .............................................................. 235VTR options ..........................................................237

W

What to do if... ...........................................................344

X

XM Satellite Radio................................................... 192Displaying the radio ID ..................................... 197How to subscribe to an XM Satellite

Radio....................................................................195If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions....... 199Overview ................................................................ 192Presetting a channel........................................... 197Selecting a channel from the list ...................198

Page 392: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

392

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:31

Map database information and updates

Page 393: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

393

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:31

Page 394: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

394

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:31

Page 395: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

395

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:31

Page 396: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

396

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:31

Page 397: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

397

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:31

Page 398: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

398

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:31

Page 399: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

399

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:31

Page 400: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

400

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.06.17 10:31

Page 401: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

401

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, “Powered by Gracenote”, MusicID, PlaylistPlus and MediaVOCS are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc.in the United States

1. Certification

Page 402: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

402

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

Page 403: TABLE OF CONTENTS - Lexus Owners...2 CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U) 14.06.17 11:11 Introduction This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully

403

CT200h_Navi_OM76146U_(U)14.12.03 15:18

For U.S. owners